JP2020081576A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine in which wiring patterns of a circuit board are appropriately formed.SOLUTION: On a game control board, a data bus is formed that is commonly used for transmission of input data from an input circuit to a game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to an output circuit. The input circuit is connected to the data bus so that wiring patterns to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit. Specific information storage means capable of storing specific information capable of specifying that a specific condition is not satisfied is provided when the specific condition is not satisfied although a predetermined condition is satisfied.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 20

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

A game machine such as a pachinko game machine or a slot machine is generally provided with a board on which an electronic device is mounted, and a board of this kind is provided between a control means such as a CPU and another electronic device. There is proposed a method for inputting/outputting data by using the data bus (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2016-93428, A

In this type of substrate, there are various problems regarding the design of the wiring pattern.

The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine in which a wiring pattern of a substrate is preferably formed.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of the means 1 of the present invention is
A gaming machine capable of playing,
Input data based on an input signal from a control means (game control microcomputer) and an electronic component (input component) used to control the control means (game control microcomputer) is used as the control means (game control microcomputer). ) And an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) and is mounted. , Including a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is commonly used for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. Included data bus,
The input circuit is connected to the data bus so that a wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than that of the output circuit,
further,
Based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has been won in the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b), a profit giving means capable of giving a profit to the player (for example, for game control) The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) includes a jackpot game, which is controlled to a probable state after the end of the game.
The specific condition can be satisfied based on at least a predetermined condition being satisfied (for example, a probability variation big hit),
When the specific condition is not satisfied even though the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to store specific information that can specify that the specific condition has not been satisfied (for example, log information of the probability change failure date/time). Specific information storage means (for example, a portion of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b that executes steps 012IWS958 to S960) is provided.
According to this feature, the input circuit that transmits the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component used for the control of the control unit to the control unit outputs to the electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control unit. Since it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of the output circuit that outputs a signal, it is possible to prevent the input data from being affected by noise or the like. In addition, the information can be preferably stored.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the present invention is the gaming machine described in means 1,
The board (game control board) is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on a first surface (mounting surface) and the data bus is formed on a second surface (solder surface).
According to this feature, the influence of noise from the electronic component on the data bus can be prevented.

A gaming machine of means 3 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit are connected through a through hole by a wiring pattern branched to a surface (mounting surface) opposite to a surface (solder surface) on which the data bus is formed. It has a feature.
According to this feature, since the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, the influence of noise can be reduced.

A gaming machine of means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
On the board (game control board), connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for mounting wiring from the outside of the board are mounted near one side (upper side), and the data bus is connected to the board (game). It is characterized in that it is formed in a region near the other side (lower side) facing the one side in the control board).
According to this feature, it is possible to secure a region for mounting electronic components such as an input circuit and an output circuit between the connector and the data bus, so that it is possible to effectively utilize the substrate region.

A gaming machine of means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
A performance indicator for displaying the performance of the gaming machine is mounted on the board (game control board),
An output circuit (third output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the performance indicator is more controllable than an output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to another indicator (game control). The microcomputer is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern up to the microcomputer can be shortened.
According to this feature, since the output circuit that outputs the output signal to the performance indicator has a shorter wiring pattern to the control means than the output circuit that outputs the output signal to another indicator, the illegal component is It is possible to make it difficult to tamper with the display content modification due to the placement of.

A gaming machine of means 6 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The input circuit and the output circuit are mounted on the board so that the orientations of the components are different from each other.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily grasp the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit.

The gaming machine of means 7 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6,
The data bus is connected to a noise removing circuit at a position closer to the control means (game control microcomputer) than the input circuit and the output circuit.
According to this feature, the influence of noise on the control means can be prevented.

The gaming machine of the means 8 of the present invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing,
Input data based on an input signal from a control means (game control microcomputer) and an electronic component (input component) used to control the control means (game control microcomputer) is used as the control means (game control microcomputer). ) And an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) and is mounted. , Including a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is commonly used for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. Included data bus,
The output circuit outputs to the first electronic component (first output component) that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). A first electronic circuit (first output circuit) that outputs a signal, and a second electronic component (second electronic component) that performs a display according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). A second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to two output components),
The first output circuit (first output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the second output circuit (second output circuit). It is characterized by being done.
According to this feature, the first output circuit that outputs the output signal to the first electronic component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game is the second electronic component that displays according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the second output circuit which outputs the output signal, the output data is affected by noise or the like and is movable according to the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the operation of the unit from being affected.

The gaming machine of the means 9 of the present invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing,
Input data based on an input signal from a control means (game control microcomputer) and an electronic component (input component) used to control the control means (game control microcomputer) is used as the control means (game control microcomputer). ) And an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) and is mounted. , Including a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is commonly used for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. Included data bus,
The board (game control board) has electronic components mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface), the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface), and is connected from the data bus through a through hole. The first wiring pattern (wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit) for outputting the wiring pattern on the first surface (mounting surface) according to the progress of the game on the first surface (mounting surface) And a branching to a second wiring pattern (a wiring pattern connected to an external output terminal) for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device.
According to this feature, by using the wiring pattern of the first surface connected through the through hole from the data bus formed on the second surface, the first surface for performing the output according to the progress of the game on the first surface side. Since the output signal according to the wiring pattern and the progress of the game is branched to the second wiring pattern for outputting to the external device, it is formed on the second surface to be branched to the first wiring pattern and the second wiring pattern, respectively. Since it is not necessary to branch from the formed data bus to the first surface side, the wiring pattern can be simply formed.

The gaming machine of the means 10 of the present invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing,
Input data based on an input signal from a control means (game control microcomputer) and an electronic component (input component) used to control the control means (game control microcomputer) is used as the control means (game control microcomputer). ) And an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) and is mounted. , Including a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is commonly used for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. Included data bus,
First input for transmitting input data based on an input signal from a first electronic component (first input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) to the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on an input signal from a circuit (first input circuit) and a second electronic component (second input component) used to control the control means (game control microcomputer) is supplied to the control means (for game control). A second input circuit (second input circuit) to be transmitted to the microcomputer) and a third electronic component (first output component, second output) based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). An output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to a component),
The first input circuit (first input circuit) and the output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) are connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) via the data bus,
The second input circuit (second input circuit) is connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) without passing through the data bus.
According to this feature, the input data based on the input signal from the second electronic component is transmitted to the control means without passing through the data bus through which the input data from the other input circuit and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Therefore, the input data based on the important input signal can be transmitted to the control means without being affected by the input data from other input circuits or the output data to the output circuit.

The gaming machine of the means 11 of the present invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing,
Input data based on an input signal from a control means (game control microcomputer) and an electronic component (input component) used to control the control means (game control microcomputer) is used as the control means (game control microcomputer). ) And an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) and is mounted. , Including a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is commonly used for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. Included data bus,
The output circuit is connected to the data bus so that a wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than that of the input circuit.
According to this feature, the output circuit that outputs the output signal to the electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control unit, outputs the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component used for the control of the control unit. Since it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the input circuit transmitted to the control means, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like.

The gaming machine of the means 12 of the present invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing,
Input data based on an input signal from a control means (game control microcomputer) and an electronic component (input component) used to control the control means (game control microcomputer) is used as the control means (game control microcomputer). ) And an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) and is mounted. , Including a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is commonly used for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. Included data bus,
The output circuit outputs to the first electronic component (first output component) that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). A first electronic circuit (first output circuit) that outputs a signal, and a second electronic component (second electronic component) that performs a display according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). A second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to two output components),
The second output circuit (second output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the first output circuit (first output circuit). It is characterized by being done.
According to this feature, the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second electronic component that performs display according to the progress of the game is the first electronic component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of the first output circuit which outputs the output signal, the data bus is connected to the data bus. Can be prevented from affecting.

Further, modes for carrying out the invention to be described later include inventions relating to the gaming machine of the following means 13. Conventionally, in a gaming machine, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-131768 (paragraph 0132, FIG. 47), abnormal history information about a game is configured to be identifiable and displayed, and all detected Some have stored error information and can check it on the error information history screen. In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, information cannot be stored properly, and in view of this point, it is required to provide a gaming machine that can store information suitably.

The gaming machine of the means 13 is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and a specific condition is satisfied (for example, that a gaming ball has won in the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b). Based on a profit-providing means capable of giving a profit to the player (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) controls the probability change state after the big hit game), the specific condition is: It is possible to be established based on that at least the predetermined condition is established (for example, the probability variation big hit), and if the specific condition is not established even though the predetermined condition is established, the specific condition is not established. It is provided with a specific information storage unit (for example, a portion executing steps 012IWS958 to S960 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) capable of storing specific information (for example, log information of the probability variation unsatisfied date and time) that can specify the fact. Characterize. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably store information.

The gaming machine of the means 14 is the gaming machine described in the means 13, and the profit giving means can give a profit related to the performance or a profit related to the content (for example, as shown in FIG. 32-49, “setting suggestion unsuccessful”). “Log information 012IW109a” and “Log information 012IW109b” indicating “point unsuccessful” are recorded). With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably store information.

The gaming machine of means 15 is, in the gaming machine described in means 13 or 14, specific information display means capable of recognizing specific information (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes step 012IWS464, As shown in FIG. 32-40(C), the log information of the probability change failure is displayed on the maintenance history screen, or the log information of “setting suggestion unsuccessful” is displayed on the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 32-49. 012IW109a and log information 012IW109b of "pointing unsuccessful" may be displayed). With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display information.

The gaming machine of means 16 is, in the gaming machine described in any of means 13 to 15, two-dimensional code output means capable of outputting information including specific information as a two-dimensional code (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, By executing steps 012IWS518 and S519 to generate and display a two-dimensional code including log information of the date and time when the probability change is not established). With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably output information.

The gaming machine of the means 17 is, in the gaming machine according to any of the means 13 to 16, any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set value “1” to set value “3”) having different degrees of advantage for the player. It is a gaming machine that can be set to any of the set values, and can store a memory area (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing information generated during a game and history information (for example, log information) of an abnormality regarding the game. A history storage means (for example, a portion of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b that executes steps 012IWS464 and S467) and an initialization process (for example, RAM clear 1) for initializing the storage contents of the storage area. Initialization processing execution means (for example, the part that executes step 012IWS051 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) and the setting change for changing the setting value when the initialization processing is executed A history display is provided with a setting change processing execution unit capable of executing processing (for example, setting change processing) (for example, a portion that executes steps 012IWS034 to S042 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)). The means is capable of displaying that the initialization process has been executed in a case where the initialization process has been executed and the setting change process has not been executed (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, step 012IWS809 By executing step 012IWS464 to display the RAM clear log information as shown in FIG. 32-41(E)), and when initialization processing and setting change processing are executed, initialization is performed. It is possible to display that the setting change processing has been executed, without displaying that the processing has been executed (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes step 012IWS811 to execute the step). By executing 012IWS464, for example, only the log information indicating the end of the setting change is displayed as shown in FIG. 32-40(D). With such a configuration, unnecessary information is not displayed, so that it is possible to prevent the history information from being difficult to confirm.

The gaming machine of the means 18 is, in the gaming machine according to any one of the means 13 to 17, a first abnormality (for example, a first left-handed notification state) and a second abnormality having a higher degree of importance than the first abnormality ( For example, an abnormality detection unit capable of detecting the second left-handing notification state (for example, a portion of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b that executes steps 012IWS107 and S111), and history storage capable of storing abnormality history information regarding a game. 32 (for example, the log area of the RAM012IW122b) and the history display means (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) capable of displaying the history information stored in the history storage means in a identifiable manner, by executing step 012IWS464. -40 and a maintenance history screen is displayed as shown in FIGS. 32 to 41), and the history storage means detects the second abnormality when the second abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means. Is stored as history information, while the information indicating that the first abnormality has been detected is not stored as history information when the first abnormality is detected by the abnormality detecting means (for example, for second effect control). By executing step 012IWS117, the CPU 012IW120b is configured to record the log information only when the second left-handing notification state occurs, and does not record the log information even when the first left-handing notification state occurs). Good. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably store and display the history information.

The gaming machine of the means 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 13 to 18, in which predetermined control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) and information from the predetermined control means are used. A specific control unit (for example, the CPU 012IW120b for second effect control) that performs control based on the original control is provided, and the specific control unit can temporarily store the date and time when the power supply to the specific control unit is stopped (for example, the second effect). The control CPU 012IW120b stores the date and time information in the temporary area of the RAM012IW122b every 100 ms by executing steps 012IWS842 to S844), and is output by the predetermined control means when the power supply to the specific control means is started. The power cut date and time that can be stored as the power cut date and time based on the input of information that can identify that the power supply has started (for example, initialization specification command and restoration command) It may be configured so as to include a storage unit (for example, a portion of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b that executes step 012IWS847) With such a configuration, the power cut date and time can be preferably stored.

The gaming machine of the means 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 13 to 19, and performs control based on information from the first control means (for example, the first effect control CPU 012IW120a) and the first control means. A second control unit (for example, a second effect control CPU 012IW120b) is provided, and the first control unit provides a plurality of pieces of information regarding the change of date and time over a predetermined period based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, 10 ms has elapsed). The first control CPU012IW120a sequentially outputs the hour signal, the minute signal, the second signal, the year signal, the month signal, the day signal, and the day of the week signal to the second control means, and the second control means. Stores a date and time change history after a certain period of time which is equal to or longer than a predetermined period after inputting a part of the plurality of pieces of information regarding the change of date and time (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b By executing 012IWS826 to S836, as shown in FIG. 32-35, it is possible to wait until 500 ms have elapsed from the reception of the hour signal and then record it in the log information as the time setting date and time). .. According to such a configuration, the date and time change history can be preferably stored.

Incidentally, the present invention may have only the invention specifying matters described in the claims of the present invention, and may have a configuration other than the invention specifying matters described in the claims of the present invention. You may have it.

It is a block diagram showing the composition of the game machine to which the present invention was applied. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing a solder surface of the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing a mounting surface in a state where the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted on the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing a configuration of a data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing a wiring pattern branched from the data bus on the mounting surface of the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing a configuration of a ground region formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing a configuration of a ground region formed on the solder surface of the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a circuit diagram showing a connection mode of the low-voltage components and high-voltage components mounted on the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the connector mounted in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing a wiring pattern around the connector formed on the solder surface of the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing a state in which the game control board in Example 1 is housed in a board case. It is a circuit diagram related to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing a wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface of the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing the relationship between the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface of the game control board and the wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface in the first embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a situation where a game control board in Example 1 was attached to a game machine. It is a figure showing an example of a situation where a game control board in Example 1 was attached to a game machine. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2. It is a figure which shows the solder side of the game control board in Example 2. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in connection with the connection of a microcomputer for game control, an input circuit, and an output circuit on the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 2. It is a diagram showing a wiring pattern formed in connection with the connection of the game control microcomputer and the input circuit and the output circuit on the mounting surface of the game control board in the second embodiment. It is a circuit diagram related to the connection of the game control microcomputer and the input circuit and the output circuit in the game control board in the second embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the specific electronic component mounted in the game control board in Example 3, (A) is a perspective view from the upper part of a specific electronic component, (B) is a specific electronic component. FIG. 4 is a perspective view from below. It is sectional drawing which shows the state in which the specific electronic component was soldered to the game control board in Example 3. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in a characteristic part 012IW. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine with the gaming machine frame being opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a loss variation pattern determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a non-reach lost variation pattern determination table. It is a flow chart which shows the game control main processing in the characteristic part 012IW. It is a flow chart which shows the game control main processing in the characteristic part 012IW. It is a flow chart which shows the game control main processing in the characteristic part 012IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process performed when a power supply is turned on. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in a setting change process. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is the flowchart which shows a part of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an initial result determination table. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start waiting processing. It is an explanatory view showing a pre-game suggestive effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start setting process. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the game suggestion production decision processing. It is an explanatory view showing a game suggested effect determination table. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production decision processing during the big hit. It is an explanatory view showing a big hit medium suggestion effect determination table, a role effect effect determination table, and a light guide plate effect determination table. It is a flow chart which shows ending production processing. It is a flowchart which shows an error alerting|reporting process. It is a flowchart which shows an error alerting|reporting process. It is a flowchart which shows an error alerting|reporting process. It is a flowchart which shows an error alerting|reporting process. It is a flow chart which shows maintenance mode processing. It is a flowchart which shows a setting change time recording process. It is a flow chart which shows current time setting processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the setting timing of the present time. It is a flowchart which shows an electric power cut date recording process. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a recording timing of log information of a power cut date and time. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a display screen in a maintenance mode. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a display screen in a maintenance mode. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a display screen in a maintenance mode. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a display screen in a maintenance mode. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the frame for game machines in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 2. It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the frame for game machines in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pachinko game machine in the modification 3. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a maintenance history screen in modification 4;

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described.

The gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention is a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine installed in a gaming hall or the like, and in particular, as shown in FIG. 1, is equipped with a gaming control microcomputer for controlling gaming. Equipped with a game control board.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game control board is connected with a plurality of input components such as various switches and sensors for detecting an input situation according to the progress of the game. The input component is, for example, a detection switch for detecting an operation by a player, a detection switch for detecting the passage of a game medium such as a game ball or a medal, a sensor for identifying the position of a movable object used for a game such as a reel, a player. The detection switch is used for various settings such as the degree of advantage, and the detection switch for detecting a door opening or abnormality.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the game control board is provided with an input circuit for detecting an input signal from these input components, and an input by which the detection state of the input signal from the input component by the input circuit is specified. The data is transmitted to the game control microcomputer and used for controlling the game by the game control microcomputer.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the game control board is connected with a plurality of output components such as a display, an LED, a motor, and a solenoid, which perform output control according to the progress of the game. The output components are, for example, a display for displaying a result according to the lottery result, a display for displaying the progress of the game and the state of the game machine, a display for instructing the player an operation mode, a value owned by the player. It is an indicator for displaying, an LED for indicating a game state, an LED for indicating the occurrence of an abnormality, a motor for operating a movable part used for a game such as a reel and a variable winning device, a solenoid, and the like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the game control board is provided with an output circuit that outputs an output signal to a corresponding output component based on output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. The control microcomputer controls the output parts according to the progress of the game by transmitting the output data to the output circuit.

In addition, the game control microcomputer, the input circuit and the output circuit are connected via a data bus, the transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The output data is transmitted via the shared data bus.

Also, not all input circuits are connected via a shared data bus, but some input circuits are directly connected to the game control microcomputer without a data bus, and a shared data bus is used. Input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer without passing through.

The output circuits are all connected via a shared data bus, but some output circuits are directly connected to the game control microcomputer without a data bus and shared. The configuration may be such that output data is transmitted from the game controlling microcomputer to the output circuit without passing through the data bus.

In addition, the data bus is connected to the external output terminal, and the output data from the game control microcomputer is output to the external device as an external output signal. It is possible to inspect the performance and the like of the gaming machine by using the output data output as.

Next, a game control board provided in the gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to Examples 1 to 3 below.

The structure of the game control board in the first embodiment will be described. The game control board has a structure in which the electronic component is mounted on one surface, the electronic component is not mounted on the other surface, and the terminals included in the electronic component are soldered. In the following, the electronic component is mounted. A surface is called a mounting surface, and a surface on which an electronic component is not mounted and terminals included in the electronic component are soldered is called a solder surface.

2 is a view showing a mounting surface of the game control board in the present embodiment, and FIG. 3 is a view showing a solder surface of the game control board in the present embodiment.
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the game control board has a rectangular shape including a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and is configured by a printed board having an insulating property. .. In addition, the game control board is formed with a plurality of through holes penetrating the mounting surface and the solder surface, and the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board are made of a conductor so as to properly connect the through holes. A plurality of formed wiring patterns are formed. In addition, in the area where the wiring pattern on the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board is not formed, an insulating area formed of an insulator and a conductor, and a ground area forming a ground is formed. The ground area is a solid land formed over almost the entire area of the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board except the area where the wiring pattern and the insulating area are formed.

As shown in FIG. 2, wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction are arranged on the mounting surface in a larger amount than the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. The number of wiring patterns extending in the direction is greater than the proportion of the wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction. Therefore, the wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction are gathered on the mounting surface, and the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction are gathered on the solder surface, and when the wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction and the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction intersect. Designs such as bypassing the wiring pattern can be reduced as much as possible.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the wiring pattern arranged on the solder surface has many wirings that extend in the same lateral direction as the long side, and therefore the distance of the wiring pattern becomes longer than that of the wiring pattern arranged on the mounting surface. However, as described above, electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface and not on the solder surface, and the wiring pattern arranged on the solder surface and having a relatively long distance is obstructed by the electronic component. Things have been avoided.

Further, when branching the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, one of the branch destination wiring patterns is formed on the solder surface, and the other is formed on the mounting surface through the through hole. One of the wiring patterns is branched without being bypassed and one of the branching destination wiring patterns and the other wiring pattern are not intersected on the same plane.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a mounting surface in a state where the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted on the game control board in the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 4, electronic components such as the game control microcomputer, the input circuit, and the output circuit are mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board. These electronic components include an electronic component in which a terminal row including a plurality of terminals arranged in one direction includes one row or a plurality of rows. Most of the electronic components including these terminal rows are arranged along the long side of the game control board, that is, in a row. As described above, on the mounting surface, the proportion of wiring patterns that extend in the vertical direction is large, and in many cases electronic components with terminal rows are arranged along the long side of the game control board, that is, arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. By doing so, it is possible to directly connect to the terminal rows arranged in the horizontal direction without changing the direction of the wiring pattern extending in the vertical direction.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 4, the input circuit and the output circuit of the electronic component including the terminal row are formed in a rectangular shape, a concave cutout is provided on one of the short sides, and It is printed, and the orientation of the component can be specified by the orientation of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. As shown in FIG. 4, the input circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the left side and the printing direction of the model number is from left to right in FIG. Are arranged so that the cutout faces to the right and the printing direction of the model number is from right to left. It is possible to identify whether there is.

FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the structure of the data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 6 is a wiring pattern branched from the data bus on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment. FIG.

On the game control board, as described above, a data bus is formed which is commonly used for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. .. The data bus formed on the game control board of the present embodiment is composed of eight wiring patterns formed on the solder surface and extending in the lateral direction. As shown in FIG. 5, on the left side of the game control board. It consists of eight wiring patterns formed to extend laterally from the through hole to which the terminal of the mounted game control microcomputer is connected to the right side. As shown in FIG. 6, the data bus and the electronic components such as the input circuit and the output circuit are connected by a wiring pattern formed so as to branch to the mounting surface side through through holes and extend vertically in the vertical direction. To be done.

When connecting the game control microcomputer and the electronic components such as the input circuit and the output circuit which are separated from each other in the horizontal direction via the data bus, first, the solder of the terminal of the game control microcomputer is extended in the horizontal direction. The wiring pattern is connected to the data bus on the surface and branched to a wiring pattern on the mounting surface side that extends in the vertical direction toward the electronic component through the through hole at the position where the electronic component is mounted, and is connected to the electronic component. Therefore, it is not necessary to bypass the wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and it is possible to efficiently connect the game control microcomputer and the electronic components that are laterally separated from each other. In addition, since the wiring pattern that forms the data bus is formed on the solder surface where the electronic components are not mounted, it is less susceptible to the noise from the electronic components on the data bus. Since the wiring patterns are branched through the holes to the mounting surface side, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is shortened, and the influence of noise from electronic components during this period is less likely to occur.

As shown in FIG. 5, the wiring patterns that form the data bus and extend in the horizontal direction are not formed in a straight line, but are formed by being divided into a plurality of wiring patterns that extend in the horizontal direction. The length of each of the divided wiring patterns (L1 to L8) is an antenna in which resonance is maximized according to a bus clock (frequency used when transmitting data on the data bus) when transmitting data on the data bus. It is formed shorter than the length (λ (bus clock)/2). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring pattern forming the data bus from having an antenna length corresponding to the bus clock and emitting unintended radio waves due to resonance. Further, even when the antenna length corresponding to the bus clock is half, the strong resonance may occur due to reflection on the surface of the substrate. Therefore, the length of each divided wiring pattern is increased. The lengths (L1 to L8) are formed to a length that is not 1/2 of the antenna length at which resonance is maximum according to the bus clock, and strong resonance occurs due to reflection on the surface of the substrate. It is also designed to prevent radio waves from being emitted.

Further, the bus clock varies depending on the game control microcomputer and the oscillator to be mounted, but the length of each of the divided wiring patterns (L1 to L8) depends on the bus clock that is the expected maximum frequency. The antenna length is shorter than the maximum resonance, and further, it is formed so as not to be 1/2 of the maximum antenna length in accordance with the bus clock having the maximum frequency. Therefore, even when data is transmitted with a bus clock having a frequency lower than the expected maximum frequency, it is possible to prevent generation of unintended radio waves.

As shown in FIG. 5, the plurality of divided horizontal wiring patterns forming the data bus are diagonally rightward or diagonally leftward, that is, a direction different from the direction of the plurality of divided horizontal wiring patterns. Are connected with a wiring pattern extending between them. The lateral wiring pattern divided into a plurality and the diagonal rightward or diagonal leftward wiring pattern are bent and connected at an obtuse angle. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted from the bent portion of the wiring pattern.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, wiring on the mounting surface side is provided through through holes (A to F shown in FIG. 5) provided on diagonal wiring patterns that connect the plurality of lateral wiring patterns to each other. A data bus is formed by branching into patterns (wiring patterns connected to A to F shown in FIG. 6) and utilizing diagonal wiring patterns that connect a plurality of lateral wiring patterns to each other. The wiring pattern forming the is branched.

In the game control board according to the first embodiment, in order to make the length of the horizontal wiring pattern shorter than the antenna length at which resonance is maximized, the horizontal wiring pattern is divided into a plurality of wiring patterns. The horizontal wiring patterns divided into two are connected by the diagonal wiring patterns formed on the same solder surface, but the horizontal wiring patterns divided into a plurality are formed on the mounting surface side. The wiring patterns are connected by different wiring patterns, that is, the wiring patterns in the horizontal direction are alternately formed on the solder surface and the mounting surface so that the length of the horizontal wiring pattern is shorter than the antenna length that maximizes resonance. Is also good. In such a configuration, it is preferable that the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction is branched at a position where the solder surface or the mounting surface is switched to the other surface. With such a configuration, the wiring pattern after branching may be bypassed. It is possible to branch the wiring patterns forming the data bus without crossing on the same plane.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the structure of the ground area formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 8 is the structure of the ground area formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, a ground region is formed over almost the entire area of the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board except the area where the wiring pattern and the insulating area are formed. The ground area formed on the game control board is composed of a first ground area and a second ground area that are electrically separated via an insulating area. On both the mounting surface and the solder surface, the first ground area is formed on the left side area of the game control board, and the second ground area is formed on the right side area of the game control board.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7, electronic components to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a low voltage (Vcc (+5V) in this embodiment) signal such as a game control microcomputer, an input circuit, an output circuit, etc. is connected. The (low-voltage component) is mounted in the region on the left side where the first ground region is formed, and the ground terminal of the low-voltage component is connected to the first ground region. On the other hand, an electronic component (high-voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a high-voltage (VLD (+24V) in this embodiment) signal, such as a drive circuit for operating a motor or a solenoid, is connected. The high-voltage component is mounted on the right side region where the two ground regions are formed, and the ground terminal of the high voltage component is connected to the second ground region. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unintended current from flowing backward from the high-voltage component to the low-voltage component via the ground region. Further, since the first ground region and the second ground region are respectively formed on the opposite sides of the game control board, they are prevented from interfering with each other even if a potential difference temporarily occurs.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, since a capacitor is provided between the first ground region and the second ground region, this capacitor temporarily serves as a space between the first ground region and the second ground region. Even if a potential difference occurs between the two, it is possible to prevent a current from flowing from one ground region to the other ground region.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, on the mounting surface and the solder surface, an insulating region in which a wiring pattern is not formed is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region, and the first ground region and the second ground region are formed. The two ground areas are electrically separated. Further, the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the first ground region and the second ground region on the solder surface are formed to overlap each other, and the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface Since the insulating area that separates the ground area and the insulating area that separates the first ground area and the second ground area from each other on the solder surface are also formed to overlap with each other, one surface of the mounting surface and the solder surface is opposite to the other surface. Even if a potential difference is temporarily generated, it is possible to prevent mutual interference.

FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the configuration of the connector mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 11 is a wiring pattern around the connector formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a state in which the game control board in the present embodiment is housed in a board case.

As shown in FIG. 10, on the game control board, a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN7 for connecting wires from the outside of the game control board are mounted near the lower side of the mounting surface. Wiring from the game control board, a signal that triggers the lottery, a signal for changing the set value that defines the degree of advantage for the player such as the lottery probability to a changeable state, and a value for changing the set value Wiring for inputting or outputting signals relating to the degree of advantage of the game, such as signals, signals for displaying information advantageous to the player on an external display, wiring for inputting a detection signal for error cancellation operation, backup power supply The wiring as a supply line of is included.

As shown in FIG. 10, the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 are not directly connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted, but shown in FIG. As described above, it is connected to the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, that is, the surface opposite to the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10, a wiring pattern is not formed around the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface, and information about the connector such as the connector number is printed around the wiring pattern. .. The information printed around the mounting portions of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is not limited to the connector number, but may be the information about the number of terminals, the direction of the connector, the connection destination, or the like.

As shown in FIG. 11, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the solder surface is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface through the through hole at the end opposite to the side connected to the terminals. Connected. In particular, the through holes a to h shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 are through holes to which the terminals of the electronic component are connected, and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals provided in the connectors CN1 to CN7 is the electronic component first. It is provided at the location connected to. Therefore, it is possible to connect from the solder surface to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface by using the through hole for connecting to the electronic component.

As shown in FIGS. 12A and 12B, the game control board is attached to the game machine in a state of being housed in the board case. The substrate case can be sealed by a one-way screw, a sealing seal, welding, or the like, and once sealed, it is difficult to open without leaving a trace. Therefore, the game control board is housed in the board case and attached to the game machine to prevent fraud on the game control board.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12A and 12B, the board case is provided with a covering portion that covers the area around the connectors CN1 to CN7 in a state where the game control board is accommodated. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10, the wiring pattern is not formed in the area of the mounting surface of the game control board which is covered by the covering portion of the board case, and the wiring pattern is formed avoiding the area. The covering portion is provided with insertion holes having substantially the same shape as the connectors CN1 to CN7, and the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed to the outside through these insertion holes so that wiring from the outside can be connected.

Even when the game control board is housed in the board case in this way, since the connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to the wiring from the outside, some gaps are formed around the connectors CN1 to CN7, but the connectors CN1 to CN7 are provided. Is not directly connected to the mounting surface, that is, the wiring pattern formed on the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted, and is different from the solder surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. It is designed to be connected to the wiring pattern formed on the opposite surface, and short-circuits the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1 to CN7 from around the portion where the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the board case. It is designed to prevent misconduct such as disconnection.

In addition, the periphery of the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface is covered with the covering portion of the substrate case, and in the area covered with the covering portion, the wiring connected to the terminals provided in the connectors CN1 to CN7. No wiring pattern including the pattern is formed, and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface in a region other than the covering portion, It is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or disconnection of the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1 to CN7 from around the portion where the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the board case.

FIG. 13 is a circuit diagram relating to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 13, Vcc (+5V) is generated by the power supply board and is also connected to the power supply input terminal Vcc of the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board. Further, Vcc (+5V) is branched from the line supplied to the game control microcomputer on the power supply board, and is connected to the charging capacitor via the backflow prevention diode. The backflow prevention diode and the charging capacitor are connected to each other. The line branched between is connected to the backup power input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer.

While the power is being supplied, Vcc (+5V) is supplied as a driving power source for the game control microcomputer and the charging capacitor is charged. On the other hand, when the power supply is stopped, the supply of Vcc (+5V) is stopped, and the backup power supply VBB charged in the charging capacitor is supplied to the game control microcomputer. The game control microcomputer is supplied with the backup power supply VBB, so that the data stored in the RAM of the game control microcomputer is held. In this embodiment, the backup power is supplied from the power supply board outside the game control board, but it may be supplied from the circuit provided in the game control board.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 15 is a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface.

As shown in FIG. 14, on the solder surface of the game control board, wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying normal power and wiring pattern VBB for supplying backup power are provided as wiring patterns forming a power supply line. Has been formed. The wiring patterns Vcc1 to Vcc3 are composed of a wiring pattern formed on the solder surface and a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, and are connected to the electronic components mounted on the game control board. To be done. On the other hand, the wiring pattern VBB is composed of only the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, as shown in FIG. That is, the wiring pattern VBB is connected to the backup power input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer only through the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface without being connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface. That is, the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply VBB from the power supply board is supplied is formed only on the solder surface. Therefore, the wiring pattern VBB supplied with the backup power supply VBB does not need to bypass the electronic components mounted on the mounting surface, and the distance of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer can be shortened, so that noise from the outside can be reduced. It is difficult to receive the noise, and it is possible to prevent the data stored in the RAM from being damaged by noise.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15, a solid land is formed on the mounting surface where the wiring pattern VBB is formed on the solder surface side. For this reason, noise is blocked by the solid land formed on the mounting surface, so that the wiring pattern VBB on the solder surface side is less susceptible to the noise. In addition, as shown in FIG. 15, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern VBB that supplies the backup power supply is more compatible on the mounting surface side than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to Vcc that supply the normal power supply. It is formed at a position where the number of intersections with the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side in the area where the wiring pattern is formed, particularly the wiring pattern used for signal transmission is reduced. Therefore, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied from the wiring pattern used for transmitting the signal formed on the mounting surface side can be suppressed as much as possible.

In the present embodiment, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern VBB that supplies the backup power source has a corresponding area on the mounting surface side more than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to Vcc that supply the normal power source. In the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side, the wiring pattern used for the transmission of the signal is formed at a position where the number of intersections is small, but among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the signal that triggers the lottery. The wiring pattern on which the signals related to the player's profit are transmitted is on the mounting surface side more than the wiring pattern on which the signals not directly related to the player's history, such as signals for controlling the output components, are transmitted. It is used for the transmission of signals formed on the mounting surface side by forming it in a position where the number of points that intersect the wiring pattern used for transmitting signals formed on the mounting surface side in the corresponding area is reduced. The influence of noise on the wiring pattern in which a signal related to the player's profit from the wiring pattern is transmitted is suppressed as much as possible.

Further, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, a wiring pattern for transmitting a reset signal to the game control microcomputer and a wiring pattern for giving an operation clock to the game control microcomputer are relatively important. Where a wiring pattern for transmitting signals intersects with a wiring pattern used for transmitting signals formed on the mounting surface side in a corresponding area on the mounting surface side, other than wiring patterns for transmitting other signals By configuring so that it is formed in a position where the number of signals is reduced, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern that transmits a relatively important signal from the wiring pattern that is used to transmit the signal formed on the mounting surface side is minimized. It can be suppressed.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which the game control board is attached to the slot machine. The slot machine is provided with game-related game components such as a liquid crystal display, a production control board for controlling production, a reel unit including a plurality of reels, and a hopper unit for paying out medals. When the game control board is attached to the slot machine, the game control board has a mounting surface side, that is, a surface opposite to the solder surface on which the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied is formed on the game component side. Attached to be placed. With such a configuration, the influence of noise generated from the game component on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied can be suppressed.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which the game control board is attached to a pachinko gaming machine. When a pachinko game machine is installed in a game arcade, it is often installed such that its back faces face another game device such as another pachinko game machine. When the game control board is attached to the pachinko gaming machine, the game control board has a mounting surface side, that is, a surface opposite to the solder surface on which the wiring pattern VBB for supplying the backup power is formed. It is attached so as to be arranged on the device side. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the influence of noise generated from another gaming device on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied.

[Operation effect 1]
In the game control board of the present embodiment, the wiring patterns are formed on both the mounting surface and the solder surface, and the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface has a ratio of wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction) to the first direction. The ratio of the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface is larger than the ratio of the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) different from the one direction, and the ratio of the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) is the first direction (vertical direction). It is characterized in that it is larger than the ratio of the wiring patterns extending in the (direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction) are gathered on the mounting surface, and the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) are gathered on the solder surface, whereby the first direction When a wiring pattern extending in the (vertical direction) and a wiring pattern extending in the second direction (the left-right direction) intersect, the design of bypassing the wiring pattern can be reduced as much as possible.

The game control board of the present embodiment is a square formed of a pair of sides (left side and right side) extending in the first direction (up and down direction) and a pair of sides (upper side and lower side) extending in the second direction (left and right direction). It is characterized by its shape. With such a configuration, the wiring pattern can be formed along the shape of the game control board without waste.

The game control board according to the present embodiment is characterized in that electronic components including a terminal row composed of a plurality of terminals are arranged so that the terminal row is arranged in the second direction (left-right direction). With such a configuration, the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (horizontal direction) can be directly connected to the electronic component.

The game control board of this embodiment has a pair of short sides (left side and right side) extending in the first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of long sides (upper side and lower side) extending in the second direction (horizontal direction). It has a rectangular shape and is characterized in that the electronic component is mounted only on the mounting surface and the electronic component is not mounted on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, it is possible to form the wiring pattern in the second direction (left-right direction) that can increase the distance on the solder surface without being obstructed by the electronic component.

The game control board of the present embodiment includes a wiring pattern in which the wiring pattern branches from one wiring pattern into two wiring patterns, and one wiring pattern of the two wiring patterns at the branch destination is formed on the mounting surface, The other wiring pattern is formed on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to detour one wiring pattern of the branch destination or to intersect one wiring pattern of the branch destination with the other wiring pattern on the same plane, and the wiring pattern is preferably formed. Can be formed.

[Effect 2]
The game control board of the present embodiment connects the first terminal (the terminal of the game control microcomputer) and the second terminal (the terminals of the input circuit and the output circuit) which are separated in a specific direction (left and right direction), and the specific signal ( A specific wiring pattern (data bus) used for transmission of input data and output data is formed, and the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is a plurality of wiring patterns formed of straight line wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction). A specific length (λ/2), which is a divided linear wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction), is an antenna length corresponding to a frequency (bus clock) of a specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized in that it is formed shorter. With such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is formed by being divided into a plurality of wiring patterns that are linear wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction), and the straight line extending in the specific direction (horizontal direction). Is formed shorter than a specific length (λ/2), which is an antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data). ) Becomes an antenna length according to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data), and it is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that linear wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) are connected by wiring patterns extending in a direction (oblique direction) different from the specific direction (horizontal direction). .. With such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into straight line wiring patterns extending in the specific direction (horizontal direction) with a simple structure.

The game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which linear wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) are connected by wiring patterns extending in a direction (oblique direction) different from the specific direction (horizontal direction). However, a wiring pattern may be formed on the mounting surface and the solder surface, and linear wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) may be alternately formed on the mounting surface and the solder surface. Even in such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into linear wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) with a simple structure.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is different from the specific wiring pattern (data bus) between the one wiring pattern extending in the specific direction (horizontal direction) and the other wiring pattern. It is characterized by branching into. With such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be appropriately branched by utilizing the space between one wiring pattern extending in the specific direction and another wiring pattern.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the linear wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) has an antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency (maximum frequency assumed as a bus clock) of each specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized in that it is formed shorter than a specific length (λ/2). According to such a configuration, the length of the linear wiring pattern extending in the specific direction (horizontal direction) is shorter than the antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency of the specific signal (input data, output data), so Even if the signal is transmitted in, it is possible to prevent the unintentional emission of radio waves.

In the game control board of the present embodiment, the linear wiring pattern extending in the specific direction has a specific length (λ/2) which is an antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized in that the length is not 1/2 (λ/4). With such a configuration, the linear wiring pattern extending in the specific direction (left-right direction) becomes 1/2 of the specific length (λ/2), and strong resonance occurs due to reflection from the surface of the substrate. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted.

[Operation effect 3]
The game control board of the present embodiment, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is connected, and the second voltage (VDL (+24V)) And a second electronic component (high-voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting the signal is connected, the first electronic component (low-voltage component) is connected to the first ground region, and the second electronic component ( The high voltage component) is connected to a second ground region separated from the first ground region by an insulating portion. According to such a configuration, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is connected is connected to the first ground region, and the second voltage is applied. The second electronic component (high voltage component) to which the wiring pattern for transmitting the (VDL(+24V)) signal is connected is connected to the second ground region separated from the first ground region by the insulating portion (insulating region). Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unintended current from flowing back through the ground.

In the game control board of the present embodiment, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is connected to the first ground region, The second electronic component (high-voltage component) to which the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of the second voltage (VDL (+24V)) is connected is connected to the second ground region separated from the first ground region by the insulating portion. In the configuration, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground region and the second electronic component is connected in the configuration in which the difference in current flowing through the wiring pattern connected between the first electronic component and the second electronic component is large. It may be configured to be connected to a second ground region separated from the first ground region by an insulating portion. With such a configuration, the wiring connected to the first electronic component and the second electronic component Even if the difference in current flowing through the pattern is large, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground region and the second electronic component is connected to the second ground region, so that an unintended current flows back through the ground. Can be prevented.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a capacitor is provided between the first ground area and the second ground area. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a current from flowing from one ground region to the other ground region even if a potential difference temporarily occurs between the first ground region and the second ground region due to the capacitor. ..

In the game control board of this embodiment, a first ground area is formed on one side (left side), a second ground area is formed on the other side (right side) facing one side, and a first electronic component (low voltage component) is formed. ) Is mounted in the first ground region, and the second electronic component (high voltage component) is mounted in the second ground region. According to such a configuration, since the first ground region and the second ground region are formed on opposite sides of the game control board, it is possible to prevent mutual interference even if a potential difference temporarily occurs.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a non-wiring pattern area (insulation area) in which a wiring pattern is not formed is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on both the mounting surface and the solder surface. Is characterized by. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the insulation between the first ground region and the second ground region.

The game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which a non-wiring pattern area (insulation area) is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on both the mounting surface and the solder surface. Even if the non-wiring pattern region (insulating region) is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on at least one of the mounting surface and the solder surface, The insulation between the second ground regions can be improved.

In the game control board of the present embodiment, the first ground area and the second ground area on the mounting surface and the first ground area and the second ground area on the solder surface are respectively formed in corresponding areas, and the mounting surface The non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) and the non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) on the solder surface are also formed in corresponding areas. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the mounting surface and the solder surface from interfering with each other even if a potential difference temporarily occurs from one surface to the other surface.

[Effect 4]
The game control board of this embodiment is attached to the game machine in a state of being housed in a board case, and connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) for attaching wiring from the outside of the game control board are mounted on the mounting surface. The terminals of (connectors CN1 to CN7) are characterized in that they are connected to the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected not to the mounting surface on which the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are mounted but to the wiring pattern formed on the opposite solder surface. It is possible to prevent an illegal act such as short-circuiting or disconnection of the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from around the portion where the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are exposed from the board case.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring connected to the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is related to the advantage of the game (a signal for shifting the setting value to a changeable state, the setting value is changed). A wiring for inputting or outputting a signal for playing, a signal for displaying information advantageous to the player on an external display, etc.). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts related to the advantage of the game.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that information (connector number) relating to the connector (connectors CN1 to CN7) is displayed around the mounting portion of the connector (connectors CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. According to such a configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected to the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, and the wiring pattern is provided around the mounting portion of the connector (connectors CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. Since it is not formed, by displaying information (connector number) regarding the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) on this portion, it is possible to effectively use the portion on the mounting surface where the wiring pattern is not formed.

In the game control board of the present embodiment, the board case is provided with a covering portion that covers the area around the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7), and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is: It is characterized in that it is formed on the solder surface in the area covered by the covering portion. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is not formed on the mounting surface even in the peripheral portion of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7), so that the connector is removed from the board case. It is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or disconnection of the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from around the exposed portion of (connectors CN1 to CN7).

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected to the wiring patterns on the mounting surface at the locations where the electronic components are first connected. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to connect to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface by using the through hole for connecting to the electronic component.

[Function and effect 5]
The game control board of the present embodiment has a mounting surface on which a plurality of electronic components including a game control microcomputer having a storage means (RAM) are mounted, and a solder surface on which no electronic components are mounted, so that the game control is performed. The microcomputer for use can hold the stored contents of the storage means (RAM) by a specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) supplied by a wiring pattern, and the specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) is used as a game control microcomputer. The wiring pattern (VBB) to be supplied to is characterized in that it is formed only on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, since the wiring pattern for supplying the specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is formed only on the solder surface on which no electronic component is mounted, the electronic component is bypassed. Since it is not necessary to form the wiring pattern and the distance of the wiring pattern can be shortened, it is difficult to receive noise from the outside, and it is possible to prevent the data stored in the storage unit (RAM) from being damaged by the noise.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the mounting surface side is attached so as to be arranged on the side of game parts (liquid crystal display, effect control board for controlling effect, etc.) related to the game. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise generated from the game component on the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies the specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that it is attached so that the mounting surface side is arranged on the side of another game device (other game machine). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise generated from another gaming device on the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies the specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer.

The game control board of the present embodiment is a solid surface area on the mounting surface side corresponding to an area where a wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying a specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is provided on the solder surface. The feature is that a ground is formed. With this configuration, the solid land formed on the mounting surface can block noise from the mounting surface side.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying a specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is more than the wiring pattern (Vcc1 to 3) for supplying other power source. It is characterized in that there are few locations that intersect with the wiring patterns that transmit signals in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from the wiring pattern transmitting the signal on the mounting surface side as much as possible.

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say

For example, in the present embodiment, an example in which the configuration according to the present invention is applied to a game control board that controls a game is explained. However, another board mounted on a gaming machine, for example, a board that controls effects The configuration according to the present invention may be applied to a board that controls the addition of a game medium or a game value, and a board that relays the boards.

The structure of the game control board in the second embodiment will be described. Similar to the first embodiment, the game control board is configured such that the electronic component is mounted on one surface, the electronic component is not mounted on the other surface, and the terminals included in the electronic component are soldered. The configuration of the game control board in the second embodiment is basically the same as the configuration of the game control board in the first embodiment, and here, the configuration different from the game control board of the first embodiment will be mainly described. ..

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a mounting surface of the game control board in the first embodiment, and FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a solder surface of the game control board in the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19, the game control board has a rectangular shape including a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and is configured by an insulating printed board. .. Further, a plurality of through holes are formed on the game control board, and a plurality of wiring patterns are formed on the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board so as to properly connect the through holes. In addition, an insulating region and a ground region are formed in the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board in the areas where the wiring patterns are not formed.

Similarly to the game control board of the first embodiment, the game control board of the second embodiment is also provided with an input circuit and an output circuit. The input circuit and the output circuit are formed in a rectangular shape and have short sides. A concave cutout is provided on one of the sides, and the model number is printed on the surface, so that the orientation of the component can be specified by the direction of the cutout and the printing direction of the model number. The input circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the left side in the figure and the printing direction of the model number is from left to right, while the output circuit is on the right side, and the notch is on the right side in the drawing. It is arranged so that the printing direction is from right to left, and it is possible to specify whether these electronic components are input circuits or output circuits depending on the position of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. There is.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the configuration of the data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in the present embodiment, and FIG. 21 is a wiring pattern branched from the data bus on the mounting surface of the game control board in the present embodiment. FIG.

On the game control board, a data bus that is commonly used for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit is formed. The data bus formed on the game control board of this embodiment is composed of eight wiring patterns formed on the solder surface and extending in the lateral direction, and as shown in FIG. 20, on the left side of the game control board. It consists of eight wiring patterns formed to extend laterally from the through hole to which the terminal of the mounted game control microcomputer is connected to the right side. As shown in FIG. 21, the data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit are connected to each other by a wiring pattern formed so as to branch to the mounting surface side through a through hole and extend vertically in the vertical direction.

In this way, when connecting the game control microcomputer and the input circuit and the output circuit which are separated from each other in the horizontal direction via the data bus, first, the terminals of the game control microcomputer are the data bus of the solder surface extending in the horizontal direction. Connected to the input circuit or output circuit, and branched to a wiring pattern on the side of the mounting surface that extends vertically toward the input circuit or output circuit through a through hole at the position where the input circuit or output circuit is mounted and connected to the input circuit or output circuit. Becomes Therefore, it is not necessary to bypass the wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and it is possible to efficiently connect the game control microcomputer and the input circuit and the output circuit that are laterally separated. Further, since the wiring pattern forming the data bus is formed on the solder surface on which the electronic component is not mounted, the data bus is less susceptible to the noise from the electronic component, and further, the data bus, the input circuit and the output circuit are Are connected by the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the through holes, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is shortened, and the influence of noise from electronic parts during this period is less likely to occur.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22, the data bus is connected to the noise elimination circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than any input circuit and output circuit connected to the data bus. The noise on the data bus is less likely to affect the game control microcomputer.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20, on the game control board, connectors CN10 to CN17 for connecting wiring from the outside of the game control board are mounted in the vicinity of the upper side in the drawing, and also constitute a data bus. The wiring pattern is formed in the region of the lower side of the game control board in the drawing, that is, in the region of the other side facing the one side on which the connectors CN10 to CN17 are mounted. Therefore, the area for mounting electronic components such as an input circuit and an output circuit between the connectors CN10 to CN17 for inputting/outputting signals to/from the electronic components outside the game control board and the data bus is widely secured. Is becoming

As shown in FIG. 20 and FIG. 21, on the game control board, an input signal from the first input component of relatively low importance among the input components used for controlling the game (sensors and switches that do not trigger lottery) A first input circuit that detects an input of a detection signal, etc., an input signal from a second input component that is more important than the first input component (a detection signal of a sensor or a switch that triggers a lottery, and an advantage) are defined. A second input circuit that detects an input of a detection signal for changing a set value, etc., based on output data from a game control microcomputer, a solenoid, a motor, and the like that operates a movable part according to the progress of a game. First output circuit that outputs an output signal to the output component, based on output data from the game control microcomputer, to various output devices such as various indicators and LEDs that display according to the progress of the game A second output circuit that outputs an output signal, which is mounted on a game control board based on output data from a game control microcomputer, and displays the performance of the game machine such as a payout rate when a game is played in a certain period. A third output circuit that outputs an output signal to the performance indicator is mounted.

Of these input circuits and output circuits, the first output circuit, the first output circuit, the second output circuit, and the third output circuit are connected to a data bus, and input data transmission and output data transmission are performed via the data bus. Is done.

As shown in FIG. 20, the wiring pattern constituting the data bus connected to the terminals of the game control microcomputer on the solder side is branched to the mounting surface side through through holes at a plurality of locations, and is vertically oriented on the mounting surface. It is connected to the formed wiring pattern. As shown in FIG. 21, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the through hole at the position M in the figure is connected to the terminal of the first input circuit. The wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the through hole at the position N in the figure is connected to the terminal of the third output circuit. Further, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the through holes at the positions O and P in the figure is connected to the terminals of the first output circuit. Also, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side connected through the through hole at the position Q in the figure is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit and branched on the mounting surface, and a part of the wiring pattern is directly exposed to the outside. Connected to the output terminal, the remaining wiring pattern is connected to the wiring pattern on the solder side through the through hole at the position R in the figure, and is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting side again at the position S in the figure through the through hole. And is connected to the external output terminal.

As shown in FIG. 20 and FIG. 21, the input circuit among the input circuit and the output circuit connected by the shared data bus has a shorter wiring pattern length to the game control microcomputer than the output circuit. It is connected to the data bus. Therefore, the input data used for controlling the game is less likely to be affected by noise or the like.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, a first output component that outputs an output signal to a first output component that operates a movable part in accordance with the progress of a game among a plurality of output circuits connected by a shared data bus 1 output circuit, data so that the length of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to the second output component that displays according to the progress of the game It is connected to the bus. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like and affecting the operation of the movable part according to the progress of the game.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the third output circuit that outputs an output signal to the performance indicator among the plurality of output circuits connected by the common data bus is the progress of the game other than the performance indicator. Is connected to the data bus so that the length of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the display (second output component) that performs the display according to ing. Therefore, it is difficult for the contents of the performance display to be modified due to the placement of the unauthorized parts.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 21, from the wiring pattern forming the data bus on the solder side, the wiring pattern on the mounting side connected through the through hole at the position Q in the figure outputs according to the progress of the game. It is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component, and is branched on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern outputs the output signal to the external device according to the progress of the game. Connected to an external output terminal for output. In this way, by using the wiring pattern of the mounting surface connected through the through holes from the data bus formed on the soldering surface, the mounting surface side is connected to the second output circuit in order to output according to the progress of the game. The wiring pattern to be connected to the second output circuit, the external output terminal, since the output signal according to the wiring pattern and the progress of the game is branched to the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal for outputting to the external device. Since it is not necessary to branch from the data bus formed on the mounting surface to the solder surface side in order to branch to each wiring pattern connected to, the wiring pattern is simply formed.

In addition, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side, which is connected through the through hole from the wiring pattern forming the data bus on the solder surface side, outputs the output signal to the second output component that outputs according to the progress of the game. It is connected to the terminals of the two output circuits, and is branched on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern is connected to the output circuit for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device. Well, even with such a configuration, in order to output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side by using the wiring pattern of the mounting surface connected through the through holes from the data bus formed on the solder surface By connecting to the wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit and the wiring pattern connected to the output circuit for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device, the plural output circuits are connected. Since it is not necessary to branch from the data bus formed on the mounting surface to the solder surface side in order to branch to each wiring pattern to be formed, the wiring pattern is simply formed.

The second input circuit of the input circuits is not connected to the data bus, and the input data is directly transmitted to the game control microcomputer without passing through the data bus. As shown in FIG. 21, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the game controlling microcomputer on the mounting surface is once connected to the wiring pattern on the solder side through the through hole at the position T in the drawing, and the position U in the drawing. Then, it is again connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side through the through hole and is connected to the terminal of the second input circuit.

In this way, the first input circuit for detecting the input of the input signal from the first input component of relatively low importance among the input components used for controlling the game is connected to the game control microcomputer via the data bus. While being connected, the second input circuit for detecting the input of the input signal from the second input component, which is more important than the first input component, is not connected to the data bus, and is directly connected without passing through the data bus. The input data based on the input signal from the second input component is connected to the game control microcomputer, and the input data from the other input circuit and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted through the data bus. Since it is transmitted to the game control microcomputer without going through, input data based on an important input signal is not affected by input data from other input circuits or output data to the output circuit, and is transmitted to the game control microcomputer. Will be transmitted.

[Effect 6]
The game control board of this embodiment is provided with a data bus which is commonly used for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the output circuit. According to such a configuration, the input circuit for transmitting the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component (input component) used for the control of the game controlling microcomputer to the game controlling microcomputer is a game controlling microcomputer. Since the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit that outputs the output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from It is possible to prevent the data from being affected by noise or the like.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit, but the output circuit is the input circuit. It may be configured to be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer becomes shorter than that, and with such a configuration, based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. An output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) transmits input data based on an input signal from the electronic component (input component) used to control the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer. Since it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the input circuit, the output data can be prevented from being affected by noise or the like.

The game control board of this embodiment is provided with a data bus which is commonly used for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The output circuit is a first output circuit that outputs an output signal to a first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer, A second output circuit that outputs an output signal to a second output component that performs a display according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer, the first output circuit, It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit. According to such a configuration, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game, the second output that performs the display according to the progress of the game It is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the parts, so that the output data is affected by noise and the like It is possible to prevent the movement of the movable part from being influenced in accordance with the progress.

The game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which the first output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit. The output circuit may be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the first output circuit. With such a structure, it is possible to respond to the progress of the game. The second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that performs display is more than the first output circuit that outputs the output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game. Is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer can be shortened, so it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise etc. and affecting the display according to the progress of the game. it can.

Further, like the game control board of the first embodiment, a first ground region on which low voltage components are mounted is formed on the left side where the game control microcomputer is arranged, and a high voltage component is mounted on the right side. When the two ground areas are formed, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game often belongs to the high voltage component. The second output circuit that is mounted in the two ground areas and outputs an output signal to the second output component that displays according to the progress of the game is often included in the low voltage component, and thus is mounted in the first ground area. The Rukoto. In such a configuration, the second output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the first output circuit, and the second output circuit is the first ground. By mounting in the area, it is not necessary to mount the second output circuit, which is a low-voltage component, in the second ground area together with the first output circuit, which is a high-voltage component, and it is possible to prevent a load from being applied to the second output circuit. it can.

The game control board of this embodiment is provided with a data bus which is commonly used for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, the data bus is formed on the solder surface, and the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected from the data bus through the through hole is output on the mounting surface according to the progress of the game. It is characterized by branching into a wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit for execution and a wiring pattern connected to an external output terminal for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device. According to such a configuration, the second output for performing the output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side by using the wiring pattern of the mounting surface connected from the data bus formed on the solder surface through the through hole Since the wiring pattern connected to the circuit and the output signal according to the progress of the game are branched to the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal for outputting to the external device, in order to branch to each of these wiring patterns Since it is not necessary to branch from the data bus formed on the solder side to the mounting side, the wiring pattern can be simply formed.

The game control board of this embodiment is provided with a data bus which is commonly used for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. A first input circuit for transmitting input data based on an input signal from the first input component used for controlling the game controlling microcomputer to the game controlling microcomputer, and a first input circuit used for controlling the game controlling microcomputer. A second input circuit for transmitting input data based on an input signal from the two input components to the game controlling microcomputer, and a first output component and a second output component based on the output data transmitted from the game controlling microcomputer. A first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the second output circuit, and a second output circuit, the first input circuit, the first output circuit and the second output circuit are connected to the game control microcomputer via the data bus The second input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the game control microcomputer without a data bus. According to such a configuration, the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is for game control without passing through the data bus to which the input data from the other input circuit and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since it is transmitted to the microcomputer, the input data based on the important input signal can be transmitted to the game control microcomputer without being affected by the input data from other input circuits or the output data to the output circuit. ..

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface and the data bus is formed on the solder surface. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from the electronic component on the data bus.

In the game control board of the present embodiment, the data bus, the input circuit and the output circuit are connected by a wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface opposite to the solder surface on which the data bus is formed through the through hole. I am trying. With such a configuration, the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, so that the influence of noise can be reduced.

In the game control board of this embodiment, connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from the outside of the board are mounted near one side (upper side), and the data bus faces one side in the game control board. It is characterized in that it is formed in a region near the other side (lower side). With such a configuration, it is possible to secure a region where electronic components such as an input circuit and an output circuit are mounted between the connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) and the data bus, so that the substrate region can be effectively used. ..

The game control board of the present embodiment is equipped with a performance indicator for displaying the performance of the gaming machine, and the third output circuit for outputting an output signal to the performance indicator outputs an output signal to another indicator. It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit for outputting. According to such a configuration, the third output circuit that outputs the output signal to the performance display is up to the game control microcomputer rather than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to another display. Since the wiring pattern is short, it is possible to make it difficult to tamper with display content modification due to the placement of illicit parts.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted so that the orientations of the components are different. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the data bus is connected to the noise removal circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than the input circuit and the output circuit. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the game control microcomputer.

Although the second embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this second embodiment, and any modification or addition within the scope of the present invention is included in the present invention. Needless to say. The same or similar configuration as that of the first embodiment has the same effect as that described in the first embodiment. Further, the modified example illustrated in the first embodiment can be applied to the second embodiment.

The structure of the game control board in the third embodiment will be described. Similar to the first and second embodiments, the game control board has a structure in which the electronic component is mounted on one surface, the electronic component is not mounted on the other surface, and the terminals included in the electronic component are soldered. The game control board according to the third embodiment is characterized by the structure of the electronic components and the through holes to be mounted. Here, the structures of the electronic components and the through holes will be described.

FIG. 23 is a perspective view showing a structure of a specific electronic component mounted on the game control board according to the third embodiment, (A) is a perspective view of the specific electronic component from above, and (B) is a specific view. It is a perspective view from below of an electronic component.

The specific electronic component is a relatively large-sized electronic component such as a key switch. The specific electronic component is provided below the specific electronic component for the purpose of fixing the specific electronic component to the board as shown in FIGS. Provided with fixing terminals 1 and 2 that are not used for propagating signals and power of the specific electronic component, and connection terminals that are connected to the wiring pattern of the board and are used for propagating signals and power of the specific electronic component. Be done. The model number of the specific electronic component is stamped or printed above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 on the side surface of the specific electronic component.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the fixing terminal as the specific electronic component, and the key switch provided with both the connecting terminal is illustrated, but other electronic components may be applied as the specific electronic component, An electronic component that does not include the fixing terminal but includes only the connecting terminal may be applied as the specific electronic component.

The through holes provided on the game control board are composed of normal through holes and specific through holes. As shown in FIG. 24(A), a normal through hole is subjected to copper plating, which is a conductor, from the solder surface to the inner peripheral surface of the through hole, so that the through hole is electrically connected between the mounting surface and the solder surface. It is a through hole. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 24(B), the specific through hole is a through hole in which the inner peripheral surface of the through hole is not subjected to copper plating and the through hole is not electrically connected between the mounting surface and the solder surface.

When soldering from the solder side to the normal through hole, the copper in the through hole is plated as shown in FIG. 24(A), so the solder in the through hole flows up to the mounting surface. However, when soldering from a solder surface side to a specific through hole, as shown in FIG. 24(B), the copper is not plated in the through hole, so the solder flows up in the through hole. Without doing so, the solder does not reach the mounting surface.

In this embodiment, the specific electronic component is fixed by inserting the fixing terminals 1 and 2 into the specific through holes, inserting the connecting terminals into the normal through holes, and soldering from the solder surface side.

In this way, the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are inserted into the specific through holes and fixed by soldering from the solder surface side, so that the solder does not reach the mounting surface. It is possible to prevent such problems that the model number printed or engraved above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 is hidden by the solder because it rises too much to the mounting surface side where the component is mounted.

In particular, because the model number is hidden by solder, it may not be possible to find it even if the part is illegally replaced.If the model number is hidden in the model test, the component configuration cannot be specified and the test does not pass. There is a possibility that it will not be possible to receive it, and there is a possibility that it will not be allowed to be installed in the game shop because the model number cannot be confirmed at the time of installation in the game shop. By fixing with, it is possible to prevent such a problem.

On the other hand, since the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are terminals that are not used for propagating signals or electric power of the specific electronic component, a problem occurs even if the electrical connection becomes weak when soldered in the specific through hole. Never. On the other hand, since the connection terminal is usually inserted into the through hole and fixed by soldering from the solder surface side, the solder reaches the mounting surface, so that the electrical connection can be ensured.

[Effect 7]
In the game control board of the present embodiment, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface of the mounting surface and the solder surface, and a wiring pattern is formed on the mounting surface and the solder surface. Insert the terminal into the through hole penetrating the surface and the solder surface, fixed by soldering the through hole and the terminal, a specific through hole to which a specific electronic component of a plurality of electronic components is fixed is formed, The specific through hole is characterized in that the mounting surface and the solder surface do not conduct, and the solder does not reach the mounting surface when the terminals of the specific electronic component are soldered from the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the specific through hole is not electrically connected between the mounting surface and the solder surface, and when the terminals of the specific electronic component are soldered from the solder surface, the solder does not reach the mounting surface. At this time, it is possible to prevent the solder from rising too much to the mounting surface side on which the electronic component is mounted and causing a problem.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that terminals for fixing the specific electronic components (fixing terminals 1, 2) are inserted into the specific through holes and soldered. According to this structure, the specific through-hole is soldered to the specific through-hole because the fixing terminals (fixing terminals 1 and 2) of the specific electronic component are soldered to the mounting surface. If this is not done, no problem will occur even if the electrical connection becomes weak.

The game control board of the present embodiment has a structure in which the fixing terminals (fixing terminals 1 and 2) of the specific electronic component are inserted into the specific through holes and soldered. A configuration may be adopted in which terminals (connection terminals) for propagating signals and power of components are inserted and soldered. According to such a configuration, the solder rises too much on the mounting surface side on which electronic components are mounted. It is possible to prevent a problem such as a terminal that propagates a signal or power of the specific electronic component being short-circuited with another terminal.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the model number of the specific electronic component is displayed (printed or engraved) above the terminals (fixing terminals 1 and 2). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the solder from rising too much to the mounting surface side on which the electronic component is mounted and hiding the model number of the specific electronic unit.

Although the third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the third embodiment, and any modification or addition within the scope of the present invention is included in the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configurations as those of the first and second embodiments have the same effects as those described in the first and second embodiments. Further, the modified examples illustrated in the first and second embodiments are also applicable to the third embodiment.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples of the embodiments described later.

In addition, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example and the configurations shown in the later-described exemplary embodiment and each modified example may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-described embodiment and the below-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplifications in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and a control means (game control microcomputer) and an electronic component used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer). An electronic circuit based on an input circuit for transmitting input data based on an input signal from the (input component) to the control means (game control microcomputer) and output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). An output circuit that outputs an output signal to a component (output component) is mounted, and a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed is provided, and the wiring pattern is input data from the input circuit. The input circuit includes a data bus shared for transmission to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. It is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the output circuit, and further, a specific condition is satisfied (for example, in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b). Based on the fact that a game ball has won in the V winning area), a profit giving means (for example, the game controlling microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) that can give a profit to the player, after the big hit game is finished. The specific condition can be established based on at least a predetermined condition being satisfied (for example, a probability variation big hit), and the specific condition can be established even if the predetermined condition is satisfied. When the specific condition is not satisfied, the specific information storage unit (for example, the second effect control) capable of storing the specific information (for example, the log information of the probability change unsatisfied date and time) that can specify that the specific condition is not satisfied. A game machine having a CPU 012IW120b for executing steps 012IWS958 to S960).

According to such a configuration, the input circuit for transmitting the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component used for the control of the control unit to the control unit, the electronic circuit to the electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control unit. Since it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of the output circuit which outputs the output signal, it is possible to prevent the input data from being affected by noise or the like. In addition, the information can be preferably stored.

An input circuit that transmits input data based on an input signal from an electronic component used for controlling the control unit to the control unit outputs an output signal to the electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control unit. In a gaming machine equipped with a board configured to be connected to a data bus so that a wiring pattern to a control means is shorter than an output circuit, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, if a V prize is won, a big hit game ends. Depending on the type of variable display result when the jackpot is controlled to the probability variation state later, the ease with which the specific condition is satisfied is changed (for example, according to the type of variable display result, the second special variable winning device 012IW007b). The ease of V winning may be changed by changing the opening period). By doing so, the ease with which the specific condition is satisfied changes depending on the type of the variable display result, so the game is less likely to be monotonous as compared with the case where the ease with which the specific condition is satisfied is constant, and the interest is improved. At the same time, the control means for controlling the game can prevent the input data from being affected by noise and the like. Further, in the case where the ease with which the specific condition is satisfied varies depending on the type of the variable display result, if the specific condition is not satisfied despite the predetermined condition being satisfied, it is possible to specify that fact. When storing information, the type of variable display result when a predetermined condition is satisfied may be stored in association with each other. By doing so, the reason why the specific condition is not satisfied even though the predetermined condition is satisfied is that the predetermined condition is satisfied with the variable display result in which the specific condition is difficult to be satisfied, or another factor (game). It is easier to check if it is due to a machine trouble or the game ball was not launched due to the intention of the player).

Furthermore, as an example of the form of a game machine that can prevent the input data from being affected by noise or the like and can store information appropriately, it is a game machine capable of playing a game, and a specific condition Is established (for example, a game ball is won in the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b), a profit giving means capable of giving a profit to a player (for example, a microcomputer for game control). 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is provided with a jackpot game that is controlled to a probability variation state after the end of the game, and the specific condition can be established based on at least a predetermined condition being satisfied (for example, a probability variation jackpot being achieved). In the case where the specific condition is not satisfied although the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to store the specific information that can specify that the specific condition has not been satisfied (for example, the log information of the probability change failure date/time). A game machine including a specific information storage unit (for example, a portion that executes steps 012IWS958 to S960 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) can be given. Hereinafter, an example of a form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Other form examples)
Hereinafter, the characteristic portion of another embodiment will be described. First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 25 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 25), a variable display (also called a special drawing game) of special symbols (also called a special drawing) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. There is provided a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols". In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is called a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also called a "second special figure game". The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers or the like) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to a variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of held storages. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also called a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also called a second reserved memory number. In addition, the total of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number is also referred to as the total pending storage number.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, which are configured to include a plurality of LEDs, are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A indicates the number of LEDs to be lit. The first pending storage number is displayed by, and the second pending display unit 25B displays the second pending storage number according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole which is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When the game balls enter the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls can be paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning port that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 26). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are provided. Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When the game balls enter the second starting winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the device including the electric tulip type accessory as long as it can be changed between the closed state and the open state.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 25, four places on the left and right lower sides of the game area), there are provided general winning openings 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when one of the general winning openings 10 is entered, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning opening is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 26), and the special winning opening door is a special area that is changed into an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for special electric auditors) is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening, and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning hole. On the other hand, in the special variable winning a prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the ON state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the special winning opening, a predetermined number (eg, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the big winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each prize hole including the general prize hole 10 is also referred to as a "prize". In particular, winning at the starting openings (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 25), a normal symbol display device 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of a normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal symbol game.

On the left side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. The universal figure game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure pending memories, which is the number of universal figure pending games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effect is provided in the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 25) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball striking device. ) Is provided with a hit ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and tilted is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 26).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 26).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the action (operation etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progression)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player's rotating operation of the hit ball operation handle 30 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the previous execution period of the general education game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general education game based on the passage) , The universal figure game based on the passage is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this ordinary figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol is "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When the "universal figure hit" is reached, the opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning port is opened).

When the game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters into the starting winning opening (winning prize) during the period during execution of the special drawing game, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state described later (starting winning occurs, If the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be immediately executed), the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) is displayed as a stop special symbol, the "big hit" symbol is given, and the jackpot symbol is given. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, "2") is stopped and displayed, it is a "small hit". In addition, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the symbol is "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

In the big hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is one of the elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier of the two. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. In this way, one cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can get the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the big hit game state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

In addition, the "big hit" is set to the big hit type. For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum open period) of the special winning opening, and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., described later) are prepared, and big hits are made accordingly. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain a large number of prize balls, or a big hit type that has few prize balls or almost no prize balls may be provided.

In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as in the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same. Etc.) the special winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state is over, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability changing state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) for shortening the average special figure changing time (period during which the special figure is changed) is executed as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average figure change time (the period during which the figure is changed) is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of being "Public hit" in the figure game is improved compared to the normal state. The control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and a "big hit" is likely to occur.

The time saving state and the probability changing state are continued until one of the end conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has been started. The end condition that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as the number of times cutting (shortening of the times of cutting, probability change of times of cutting, etc.).

The normal state is a game state other than special states such as a big hit game state, which is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a probability variation state, etc., and the display result in the figure game is "universal figure win". Probability and probability that the display result in the special figure game is "big hit", etc., the pachinko gaming machine 1 returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the initial setting state (for example, when the system is reset). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

A state in which the probability variation control is executed is also referred to as a high accuracy state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not executed is also referred to as a low accuracy state. A state in which the time saving control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which the time saving control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the time saving state is a low accurate high base state, the definite change state is a high accurate high base state, and the normal state is a low accurate low base state. The highly accurate and low base state is also referred to as the highly accurate low base state.

After the small hit game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). Note that the display result of the special figure game does not have to be "small hit".

The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game or enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. However, in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 is performed. May be performed by turning on/off the light, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As effects to be executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game is displayed. In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (derived).

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative design stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the big hit combination described later, the decorative design which is not yet stopped and displayed is variably displayed. Is an aspect that continues.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the proportion of the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) that is a “big hit” (also called a big hit reliability or a big hit expectation degree) according to the effect mode. Different types of reach effects are executed. Reach productions include, for example, normal reach and super-reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the pattern is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, "7") is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. ..

In the case of "probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is finished, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7", etc.) are also stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot gaming state is transformed to the probability variation state. In the case of "uncertain variation big hit (normal big hit)" that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation design, and the even decoration pattern is also referred to as a non-probability variation design (normal design). After the reach mode is achieved with the non-probability variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation jackpot” may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative design (for example, "" 1 3 5”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “small hit”). As an example, the decorative patterns forming the chances are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state) and when it is "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special drawing game is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative design does not become the reach mode, but as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "non-reach lost"). Further, when the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination ("reach miss"). (Also referred to as) fixed display may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative design is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice production includes a notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the prefetching notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, once the decorative design is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative design, and then the variable display is resumed, one variable display can be simulated like multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

Even during the big hit game state, a big hit mid-game production for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit performance, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect showing that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, in some big hitting type (the big hitting type of the big hitting game state of the form similar to the small hitting game state, for example, the big hitting type which makes the following game state the high-precision state) big hitting game By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-precision state. May be.

Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and progresses in the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of general figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling a gaming state, a small hitting gaming state, a gaming state, etc. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display device 20, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal figure hold indicator 25C, and the like, and an output port for transmitting the signal.

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (the game ball passes or the game ball passes from the various switches for detecting the game ball (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch 23)). A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when the vehicle has entered is transmitted and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, production control board (command for designating (notifying) the progress status of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), a variation pattern used when the special figure game is executed (details will be described later). )), the status of the game (for example, the start and end of variable display, the status of opening of the special winning opening, the occurrence of winnings, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery.

On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125 are mounted.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121, thereby performing a process together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12, and an effect to be executed). (Including the determination of). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the effect execution based on a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and is a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal according to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designating signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output the sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. Alternatively, a lamp signal (a signal that specifies the lighting/extinguishing state of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. In addition, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L, 8R, drives the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 8L, 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

It should be noted that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of turning on/off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal or lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32). You may do it.

The random number circuit 124 updatable counts the numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port of.

Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main processing shown in FIG. 27, the CPU 103 first sets interruption prohibition (step S1). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register settings, settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control command is received, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, for example, in the image display device 5.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop time process immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 stops operating due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed by using the error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

And CPU103 transmits the production control command which directs recovery from power failure to production control board 12 (Step S7). Along with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power interruption, and a production control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later. When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of recovery from power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that recovery from power failure has been performed or is being recovered from power failure. The screen is displayed to The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). Then, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 28 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, and thereby the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. Whether or not the detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, starting information (starting) Data such as information indicating the number of winnings and the like, probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, whereby the execution and suspension of the special symbol game, the control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized. See below).

Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). CPU103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41) execution and hold management, It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "universal figure hit". The ordinary figure game is executed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the number of ordinary figure reservations is displayed by turning on the ordinary figure hold indicator 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when an electric power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 28 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of held memories is executed. When the start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the big hit type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. In addition, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of holding memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of holding memories, and the look-ahead determination is performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of the winning prize thus set to be transmitted is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting a production control command corresponding to each process to the production control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" or "small hit" and "big hit" when the big hit type Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set corresponding to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special drawing game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order winning).

When making various decisions based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values that are compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process uses a random number value for fluctuation pattern determination to select one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the processing to determine. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure change time) (also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether reach or not), the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, the setting process for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol It includes the process of measuring. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, the stop display (deriving) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes the process to set up for. When the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". When the display result is "miss", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "Small hit" or "Loss", when the game is controlled to the time saving state or the probability changing state, and when the cut-out is completed, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The big hit opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This big hit opening preprocessing includes processing for starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening in the open state based on that the display result is "big hit" Has been. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the special winning opening and an upper limit number of executions of the round are set according to which the big hit type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening preprocessing is completed.

The big hit opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The processing during the big hit opening ends.

The post-big hit opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big jackpot post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the big winning opening has reached the set upper limit number of executions, when the maximum number of executions has been reached, the big hit game state It includes the process of setting to terminate the. When the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution number, the special figure process flag The value is updated to "7". After the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The big hit ending process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". In this big hit end processing, waiting processing until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, or a certain change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening to the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result of "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing is ended.

The small hitting open process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the big winning opening and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included is included. When the timing of ending the small hitting game state is reached by returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during opening of the small hitting ends.

The small hit ending process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is executed. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hitting end processing is ended.

(Main operation of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 30. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 30 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register settings of the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit) are performed. Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control processing, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation are executed.

Then, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on the CTC register setting, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated each time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is fetched from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 is stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. The reception flag provided is turned on. When the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After the command analysis process is executed in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and the movable body 32. The control for operating various effect devices, such as the drive operation of, is performed. Further, with respect to the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process processing of step S76, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing in step S73.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 30 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process processing shown in FIG. 31, the effect control CPU 120 first executes pre-reading notice setting processing (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice production are performed based on the production control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, the processing for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols in the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command or the like specifying start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting processing, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (fixed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, the reach effect and various The presence/absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined. Then, the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result or the like is set. Then, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in response to the instruction to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control section 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L, 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and sending a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control is performed during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating that the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed from the main board 11 is received. Corresponding to what has been done, the fixed decorative design which is the display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display effect effect processing ends.

The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In the special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. When a production control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6." Update to ". On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hitting. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command is not received without receiving the command designating the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “miss”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

The effect process during the small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. . Further, in the small hitting production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to end the small winning game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small winning finish production. The value is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is finished.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In the small hitting end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect processing is ended.

The big hit midfield effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit mid effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating termination of the big hit game state from the main board 11. It updates to "7" and finishes the big hit midfield effect process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and performs various kinds of effect control of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the ending effect process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but encloses the game medium and gives a score based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

What is displayed during variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting a medal, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus when the stop symbol combination becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by The present invention can be applied to a slot machine in which one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus) are installed.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device included in. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game execution mode is not limited to that executed by mounting a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the hardware resources of other devices may be directly used on the network connected via a communication line. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) is “0%”. May be included. For example, it is also included that one is a ratio of "0%" and the other is a ratio of "100%" or a ratio less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 012IW)
Next, the characteristic part 012IW will be described. 32-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the characteristic unit 012IW. In the characteristic portion 012IW, as shown in FIG. 32-1, a passage gate 012IW041 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 in place of the passage gate 41 shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 012IW041 is detected by the gate switch 012IW021 (see FIG. 32-2).

Further, in the characteristic part 012IW, as shown in FIG. 32-1, instead of the special variable winning a prize ball device 7 shown in FIG. 25, the first special winning opening forming the first special winning opening is formed on the right side of the game area. The variable winning device 012IW007a and the second special variable winning device 012IW007a forming the second big winning opening are provided. The game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 012IW007a is detected by the first count switch 012IW023a (see FIG. 32-2). In addition, the game ball that has won the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is detected by the second count switch 012IW023b (see FIG. 32-2). Further, a so-called V winning area is provided in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b, and the game ball that has won the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is a V winning switch 012IW024 (Fig. 32- 2)).

In this example, the game ball that has won the general winning opening 10 is detected by the winning opening switch 012IW010a (see FIG. 32-2).

Further, in this example, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) inputs the detection signal from the gate switch 012IW021 (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 012IW041), the game ball passes through the passage gate 012IW041. Is transmitted to the second effect control board 012IW12b with a gate passage designating command designating that the player has passed. Further, when the game control microcomputer 100 inputs the detection signal from the winning opening switch 012IW010a (when the gaming ball wins the general winning opening 10), the winning opening that specifies that the general winning opening 10 has been won. The control for transmitting the winning designation command to the second effect control board 012IW12b is performed.

Further, in this example, when the game control microcomputer 100 receives a command indicating that the full-filled state of the hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) is detected, for example, from the payout control microcomputer mounted on the payout control board. , A control to send a full tank detection command indicating that the full state of the hit ball supply plate (lower plate) has been detected to the second effect control board 012IW12b. It should be noted that the payout control microcomputer checks, for example, whether or not a detection signal is input from a full tank switch for detecting a full tank state provided on a hit ball supply tray (lower tray), The full state of the supply plate (lower plate) can be detected.

In this example, since the passage gate 012IW041 is provided in the right area of the game area, when the game state is controlled to the high base state, the player shoots at the right side of the game area. It is advantageous to perform an operation (so-called right-handed operation). Further, in this example, the first special variable winning device 012IW007a and the second special variable winning device 012IW007b are provided in the right area of the game area, so that the player who has performed the right hit operation during the big hit game. Is advantageous.

On the other hand, in this example, when the game state is not controlled to be in the high base state (that is, is controlled to be in the low base state) and the jackpot is not being played, the player aims at the left side of the game area. It is more advantageous to perform a shooting operation (so-called left-handed operation) because the game ball can easily win the first start winning port.

In this characteristic part 012IW, in the case of a probability variation big hit, for example, a 16 round big hit game is executed, and in the first round to the third round and the fifth round to the 16th round, the first special variable winning device 012IW007a The open state is controlled until a predetermined period (29.5 seconds in this example) elapses or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are won, and a second special variable winning is performed in the fourth round. The device 012IW007b is controlled to be in an open state until a predetermined period (29.5 seconds in this example) elapses or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are won. Then, in the fourth round, on the condition that the game ball has won in the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b, the gaming state is controlled to the probable changing state after the jackpot game is over. In this example, in the case of a probability variation big hit, winning in the V winning area is a condition, but the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is opened for a relatively long period (29.5 seconds in this example). Therefore, after the big hit game is finished, it will be controlled to the probability change state.

In the characteristic part 012IW, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is a special symbol process process (step S25) during the big hit opening process (step S115) or a big hit opening process (step S116). In, when it is detected that the game ball has won in the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b (specifically, when an ON signal is input from the V winning switch 012IW024), the game ball is in the V winning area. Control for transmitting a V winning designation command for designating that a prize has been won (that a V winning has occurred) to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is performed.

In the case of an uncertain variation big hit (normal big hit), for example, a 16 round big hit game is executed, and in the first round to the third round and the fifth round to the 16th round, the first special variable winning device 012IW007a. Is controlled to an open state until a predetermined period (29.5 seconds in this example) elapses or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are won, and in the fourth round, the second special variable The winning device 012IW007b is controlled to be in an open state until an extremely short period (0.1 second in this example) elapses. In this example, in the case of a normal big hit, the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is controlled to be in an open state in the fourth round as in the case of the probability variation big hit, but in an extremely short period (in this example, 0.1 Since it is only released for a second), it is rarely controlled to a definite change state after the jackpot game is over.

Further, in this characteristic part 012IW, as shown in FIG. 32-2, instead of the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 26, a first effect control board 012IW12a and a second effect control board 012IW12b are mounted.

The first effect control board 012IW12a is equipped with a first effect control CPU 012IW120a, a ROM012IW121a, a RAM012IW122a, a display control unit 012IW123, and an I/O012IW125a. The first effect control CPU 012IW120a has a function of receiving a command from the second effect control CPU 012IW120b mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b, and executing an effect based on the received command. In this example, the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B are input to the first effect control CPU 012IW120a mounted on the first effect control board 012IW12a. In this example, the first effect control CPU 012IW120a is set to 10 ms as a timer interrupt time at the start of power supply, and a timer interrupt is generated every 10 ms to execute various processes.

The second effect control board 012IW12b is equipped with a second effect control CPU 012IW120b, a ROM012IW121b, a RAM012IW122b, a random number circuit 012IW124, an I/O012IW125b, and a real-time clock 012IW126. The second effect control CPU 012IW120b has a function of executing effect control main processing, receives an effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, and based on the received effect control command. It has a function to execute effect control process processing (however, it controls the effect means such as the actual image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 and the input means such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. The control of the part that receives an input from is performed on the side of the first effect control CPU 012IW120a). In this example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is configured to set 10 ms as a timer interrupt time at the start of power supply, and a timer interrupt is generated every 10 ms to execute various processes.

In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b has a function of recording predetermined log information in a log area provided in the RAM012IW122b using the date and time information output by the real-time clock 012IW126. Further, in the present characteristic part 012IW, the RAM 012IW122b is backed up by a backup power supply mounted on a power supply board (not shown), and is recorded in at least the log area for a predetermined period even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. Log information is retained.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 32-2 and 32-3, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into an outer frame 012IW001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a gaming board constituting the gaming board surface. (Gauge board) 2 (see FIG. 25) and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 012IW003 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device. Further, in the gaming machine frame 012IW003, a glass door frame 012IW003a having a glass window is provided between a door open position that opens the front surface of the gaming machine frame 012IW003 and a door closed position that closes the front surface. The game area is rotatably provided and can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 012IW003a. When the glass door frame 012IW003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the gaming machine frame 012IW003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it. A player other than the store clerk can open the gaming machine frame 012IW003 and the glass. The door frame 012IW003a cannot be opened.

The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 while being housed in a board case 012IW201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. Further, the main board 11 is provided with a setting key 012IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state described later.

The setting switching main body unit provided with an operation unit such as these setting keys 012IW051 that can be operated by the player is housed in the substrate case 012IW201 together with the main substrate 11, and the setting key 012IW051 does not need to open the substrate case 012IW201. The substrate case 012IW201 is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the right side of the back side so that the board can be operated.

Since the board case 012IW201 having the setting key 012IW051 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 3 using the door key. Further, since the setting key 012IW051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the store clerk or the like in the game arcade, only the store clerk who possesses the setting key can operate it. The setting key 012IW051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON/OFF switching operation described later. In the characteristic part 012IW, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may also be used.

Further, the board case 012IW201 is provided with a display monitor 012IW029 and a display changeover switch 012IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 012IW029. The display monitor 012IW029 and the display changeover switch 012IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged in the upper left portion of the board case 012IW201. That is, the display monitor 012IW029 and the display changeover switch 012IW030 are arranged in front of the main case 11 of the board case 012IW201 when the main board 11 is viewed. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized without opening the gaming machine frame 012IW003, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 11 refers to the back surface side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame 012IW003 opened. It is the front when visually recognized, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

As described above, the setting key 012IW051 in the present characteristic part 012IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not operate. The setting key 012IW051 may be operated from the inside of the installed gaming island or the like. Therefore, in the present characteristic portion 012IW, as shown in FIGS. 32-3 and 32-4, the right end portion of the board case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051 is provided at the right end portion of the outer frame 012IW001a when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. A security cover 012IW500A is attached to cover the rear side from the back side. The security cover 012IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 012IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 012IW500Ab extending from the rear end of the short piece 012IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. , And is made of a transparent plate-shaped synthetic resin material. The vertical dimension of the short piece 012IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 012IW201. The security cover 012IW500A is fixed to the right end of the outer frame 012IW001a via the front end of the short piece 012IW500Aa.

As shown in FIG. 32-3, the long piece 012IW500Ab contacts (or approaches) the right portion of the board case 012IW201 from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. By doing so, the right side of the substrate case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the setting key 012IW051 becomes inoperable by the long piece 012IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32-4, in the state where the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the setting key 012IW051 moves together with the gaming machine frame 012IW003 and moves away from the long piece 012IW500Ab. When the covered state of 012IW500Ab is released, the state becomes operable.

In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present feature section 012IW is maintained in a restricted state in which the operation of the operation section including the setting key 012IW051 is restricted by the security cover 012IW500A when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. On the other hand, in the state where the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the restriction state by the security cover 012IW500A described above is released, and the operation of the setting key 012IW051 is permitted.

Since the board case 012IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 012IW051 when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. Cannot open the game machine frame 012IW003 by operating the setting key 012IW051 to change the set value.

However, in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a gaming island (not shown) of the gaming hall, even if the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, for example, with another pachinko gaming machine adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Between the gaming device such as a card unit or the like installed in between or the spacer member and the pachinko gaming machine 1, an illegal member such as a wire or a cell plate is inserted, and a setting key 012IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is inserted. Since there is a possibility that a fraudulent act such as changing the set value is performed by operating the, the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 012IW051 is restricted by the security cover 012IW500A in the state where the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. By maintaining the restricted state as described above, it is possible to suitably suppress the above fraudulent acts.

Even when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed and the right side of the back surface of the board case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051 is covered with the security cover 012IW500A, the board case 012IW201 is housed in the board case 012IW201 through the transparent security cover 012IW500A. Since it is possible to see through the main board 11 and the like on which it is mounted, it is possible to easily confirm the mounting surface on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted on the main board 11 and the situation such as a seal.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area, whereby various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

In the characteristic part 012IW, on the main board 11 side, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the general figure display result determining Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR4 and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be updated by software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game controlling microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game controlling microcomputer 100. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that forms a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 32-5 and 32-6, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. Further, in the ROM 101, table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or an ordinary symbol. A fluctuation pattern table for storing a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 32-5(A), the display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 32-5(B), and FIG. -5 (C) display result determination table (setting value 3), big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 32-6 (A), big hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), small hit variation pattern determination table ( (Not shown), a loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 32-7, a public figure display result determination table (not shown), a universal figure variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present characteristic part 012IW is configured such that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the jackpot (ball-out rate) is changed. .. The set value is made up of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 being the lowest payout rate, and the higher the value being in the order of 1, 2 and 3, the higher the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2 and 3, the advantage gradually increases. In the characteristic part 012IW, the winning probability of the small hit is the same regardless of the set value.

(Display result judgment table)
FIGS. 32-5(A) to (C) are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, that is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set.

As shown in FIG. 32-5(A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1, if the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is a variable display target. If the set values are “2” and “3”, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 in the non-probable variation, 1/32 in the probable variation). On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "2" and "3". It is supposed to do. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even if is targeted for variable display, the big prize is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/320 for non-probability change, 1/32 for probability change). To do. On the other hand, half of these determination values are set as the determination values corresponding to the small hit, so that the first special symbol has a small probability with a higher probability (1/2) than the case where the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. It is supposed to win.

Further, as shown in FIG. 32-5(B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. Win the jackpot with a higher probability than in some cases (1/300 when uncertain change, 1/30 when uncertain change). On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "3". It is supposed to do. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even if is targeted for variable display, the big prize is won with the same probability as 1st special symbols are targeted for variable display (1/300 at non-probability change, 1/30 at probability change). To do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, there is a higher probability than when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the set value The winning probability is a small win with the same probability (1/2) as when "1" or "3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 32-5(C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280 in the non-probable variation, 1/28 in the probable variation) than in the case of "2". On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "2". It is supposed to do. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, the first special symbol is the target of variable display, with the same probability (1/280 when uncertain variation, 1/28 when probability variation) To do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, there is a higher probability that the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the set value The winning probability is small with the same probability (1/2) as when "1" or "2".

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the jackpot shown in FIGS. 32-5(A) to (C). When the hit determination value matches, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 32-5(A) to (C), it is determined that the special symbol is to be the small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with a probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 32-5(A) to (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit and the probability (ratio) of a small hit. Also, to determine whether to make a big hit, it means to decide whether to control the big hit gaming state, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design. Also, to determine whether to make a small hit, it is to determine whether to control the small hit game state, stop in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B It is also to decide whether or not to make a symbol a small hit symbol.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 32-5, the case where the winning probability of the small hit is the same regardless of the set value is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, like the winning probability of the big hit, the winning probability of the small hit may increase as the value of the set value increases in the order of 1, 2, 3. Further, in this case, the setting difference of the winning probability of the small hit may be the same as the setting difference of the winning probability of the big hit. Specifically, if the winning probability of the small hit at the setting value “1” is set to 1/100, the winning probability of the small hit at the setting value “2” is designed to be 1/93.75, You may set so that the winning probability of the small hit at the setting value “3” may be 1/87.5.

Further, in a gaming machine in which no small hit is provided, the configuration shown by the characteristic part 012IW may be applied.

Further, in the characteristic part 012IW, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit, using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 32-5(A) to (C). The big hit judgment table and the small hit judgment table are provided separately, and the judgment of the big hit is in the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variation special figure designation buffer. The common table may be used, and the small hit determination may be performed using different tables for the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first and the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the second.

Further, in the present characteristic part 012IW, the case where the degree of advantage increases in the order of the set value “1”<the set value “2”<the set value “3” is shown, for example, the order of the degree of advantage according to the gaming state. May be changed. For example, it is applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to have a high probability/high base state, maintains the high probability/high base state until the next big hit occurs, and can obtain a certain amount of prize balls in a small hit game. In this case, in this example, as shown in FIG. 32-5, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit occurs with a high probability of 1/2 and a period in which a prize ball is easily obtained Therefore, in a specific game state (high probability/high base state in this example), unlike other game states, on the contrary, big hits are less likely to occur (high probability/high base state is easy to continue) The value “1” may be set to have the highest degree of advantage.

In addition, for example, when applied to a gaming machine in which the probability variation state ends based on the fact that the variation display is performed a predetermined number of times (the probability variation end number) after being controlled to the probability variation state (high probability state), the same probability variation is applied. If it is the number of times of termination, the probability change continuation rate (rate of condominium) may be configured to increase in the order of set value “1”<set value “2”<set value “3”.

Although the characteristic part 012IW is provided with a total of three set values 1 to 3 as settable values for the pachinko gaming machine 1, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

(Big hit type determination table)
FIG. 32-6(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the characteristic part 012IW, when the jackpot type is determined using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed), A common jackpot type determination table is used when the jackpot type is determined by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). Although it is configured to be used, different tables may be provided so that the proportion of which jackpot type is determined is different.

The jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot type A to jackpot type C based on the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination. It is a table that is referred to when deciding on either.

In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 32-6(A), the determination value corresponding to the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination is assigned for each set value, but for simplification of description, assignment is made. The ratio of the determined judgment values is shown. In other words, the ratio of which of the big hit type A to the big hit type C is determined for each set value is shown. Note that in the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 32-7, the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 32-8, and the like, which will be described later, the determination value corresponding to the random number is actually assigned. For simplicity, the percentage of assigned decision values is shown.

As shown in FIG. 32-6(A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the setting value is “1”, the percentage determined as the jackpot type C is high, and when the setting value is “2”, The determination value is assigned such that when the jackpot type B has a high proportion and the set value is “3”, the jackpot type A has a high proportion.

Here, the jackpot type in the main feature portion 012IW will be described with reference to FIG. 32-6(B). In the main feature portion 012IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in the big hit game are determined for each jackpot type. Has been.

The fanfare period is, for example, a period in which the big hit opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the big hit symbols are stopped and displayed on the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b side. It is a period in which the fanfare production as a production operation for notifying the start of the big hit game state is executed after the winning.

The interval period is, for example, a period in which the jackpot opening post-processing in step S116 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the big winning opening is opened on the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b. Is a period in which after the end of the round, the interval effect as the effect operation for notifying the start of the next round is executed.

The ending period is, for example, a period in which the jackpot end process of step S117 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the end of the jackpot game state is notified on the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b side. This is a period in which the ending effect as the effect operation is performed.

As shown in FIG. 32-6(B), the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are the longest in the jackpot type A, the longest in the jackpot type B, and the longest in the jackpot type C. It is set to be short.

As described above, in the characteristic part 012IW, when the set value is “1”, the ratio of determination as the jackpot type C is high, and thus the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are likely to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the percentage of determination as the big hit type A is high, and therefore the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are likely to be relatively long. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3”.

The feature part 012IW is configured such that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit increases in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3”, but at the same time, the set value is “1”. It is also configured such that the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of “<“2”<“3”. With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the jackpot is high, it is possible to lengthen the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, that is, delay the progress of the game, and thus the gambling gambling Can be prevented from becoming too high.

In this feature part 012IW, during the big hit game, it is configured to be able to execute a big hit medium suggestion effect (details will be described later) that suggests a set value, but this big hit medium suggestion effect is performed in the fanfare period, interval period and ending. It is feasible in the period. With such a configuration, the fun of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be increased. Also, by directing the interest of the player to the suggestive effect during the big hit, it is possible to make the duration of each period less noticeable.

In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image) that is difficult for the players to notice the length of the period is commonly executed.

Further, in the characteristic part 012IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are set for each big hit type, and the percentage of which big hit type is determined is different for each set value, so that the big hit When the winning probability (ball payout rate) is set high, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are set to be longer, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the configuration is not limited to this. The fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, any one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table in which the determination values are set such that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in which a relatively long period is set is selected in order of the big hit type A<B<C is used. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be made longer in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3”.

In this characteristic part 012IW, in any of the big hit type A to the big hit type C, the time saving control and the probability variation control executed after the end of the big hit game state are a predetermined number of times (100 times in this characteristic part 012IW). The figure game ends, or the big hit game state is entered before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. For example, the number of time saving control and probability variation control may be different for each big hit type. May be, in the case of a specific big hit type, high-precision control and time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state, continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit game state It may be done. In the case of such a specific big hit type, a big hit game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state, that is, a so-called condominium state. In the feature part 012IW, the jackpot rate is different for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, the probability variation continues for each set value. The rate (rate of consecutive holidays) may be different.

Further, in the present characteristic part 012IW, there is no difference in the degree of advantage between the big hit type A to the big hit type C (for example, the number of rounds during the big hit game, the presence/absence of time saving control and probability variation control, the number of times of control, etc.), and the fanfare period and interval It is configured so that the average period of the period and the ending period is different, for example, for each big hit type, the number of rounds during the big hit game, the presence or absence of time saving control and probability variation control, the number of times of control is different, and the advantage is different You may do it. In this case, the effects during the round may be different for each jackpot type, or may be the same regardless of the jackpot type.

In the characteristic part 012IW, according to the set value, the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is determined from the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C at different rates. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value that is set, one of the jackpot types A, the jackpot types B, and the jackpot types C that cannot be determined or There may be more than one. That is, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), or the specific jackpot type is 100%. Included in deciding on a percentage.

Further, in the characteristic part 012IW, the case where the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are different depending on the type of big hit is shown. The period may be different. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be uniformly determined according to the set value "1" to "3". Further, for example, depending on which one of the set values “1” to “3” is set, a lottery process is performed with a selection probability according to the set value, and a fanfare period, an interval period, and an ending period are determined. You may.

In this way, in the characteristic part 012IW, the determination ratio of the big hit type when the variable display result is a big hit is different according to the set value set, so that it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. ..

Although the feature part 012IW determines the big hit type by using MR2 which is a random number value for big hit type determination, the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is a special figure display result. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random number value for determination.

Further, in the characteristic part 012IW, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is to the player (the big hit probability and the small hit probability increase, and the big hit type C as the big hit type is easily determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player.

Further, in the present characteristic part 012IW, while the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game itself does not change, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of the one, the game property may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is a game property of looping at a rate of 65% (so-called probability variation loop type), When the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a specific round during the jackpot game. While controlling the gaming state after the big hit game ends to a probable state based on passing a predetermined count switch, the percentage of game balls passing through the count switch during the big hit game varies depending on the big hit type When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50. It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the game ball is controlled to a big hit game state on the basis of the game ball passing through a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, although the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same in playability as 1 to 3, the probability of a big hit or a small hit is higher than that in the case of any of these set values 1 to 3. It is also possible to provide a setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4).

Furthermore, in this way, when changing the game characteristic according to the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (a game ball passes through the count switch). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time it is played, and when the set value is 2 or 3, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a game switch (game ball is It may be used as a switch for controlling the game state to a positive change state or a big hit game state based on passing through the count switch.

(Small hit type judgment table)
FIG. 32-6(C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. As shown in FIG. 32-6(C), in the feature part 012IW, small hit types A to C are provided as small hit types. As shown in FIG. 32-6(C), in the present feature portion 012IW, the determination percentages of the small hit types A to C are the same regardless of which of the set values “1” to “3” is set.

Further, in the present characteristic part 012IW, regardless of which of the small hit types A to C, the opening period and the number of times of opening the special winning opening during the small hit game are the same, and the advantage degree in the game is the same. ..

(Variation pattern determination table)
The ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, and the fluctuation pattern is selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the pre-determined result. It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, a big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined to make the variation display result "big hit" and a variation display result "small hit" The small hitting variation pattern determination table used when the variation is determined in advance and the variation variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “missed” are prepared in advance. ..

(Loss variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 32-7 is an explanatory diagram of a loss variation pattern determination table. In the characteristic part 012IW, a period (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period) from the time when the setting is changed when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) and other periods ( In the following, it will be referred to as a non-special period), and different loss variation pattern determination tables are used.

Specifically, in the special period, the variation pattern is determined using the first lost variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 32-7(A), and in the non-special period, it is shown in FIG. 32-7(B). The variation pattern is determined using the second lost variation pattern determination table. In the characteristic part 012IW, the period from the time when the setting is changed at power-on to the variable display being performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) is a special period, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, for example, the period until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) may be set as the special period regardless of whether the setting is changed when the power is turned on. Further, by using the real-time clock 012IW126 or the like, a special period may be set in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). Also, the period until the first big hit occurs may be a special period.

32-7 (A) and (B), the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables are normal reach loss and super reach loss in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3”. The determination value is assigned such that the ratio is high and the ratio of non-reach loss is low. With such a configuration, the execution ratio of the normal reach or the super reach differs depending on the set value, and thus the set value is suggested by the frequency at which the normal reach or the super reach is executed.

Further, the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 32-7(A) has a higher ratio of normal reach loss than the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 32-7(B), and further has the set value. The determination values are assigned so that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between the two becomes large. With such a configuration, in the special period, it is easier to recognize the difference in the frequency of executing the normal reach than in the non-special period (that is, it is easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value), and thus the motivation for playing the game in the special period. Can be given, and the entertainment of the game can be enhanced.

Note that, for example, fluctuation patterns involving super reach (or specific fluctuation patterns among them) are determined at the same rate regardless of the difference in set values (or regardless of the difference between the special period and the non-special period). You may do it. By doing so, the execution ratio differs only for the specific variation pattern (normal reach loss in this example) according to the setting value, and the setting value is suggested by the frequency with which the specific variation pattern is executed. become. In addition, conversely, the selection ratio of the variation pattern that causes the super reach loss may be different depending on the set value.

In addition, the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 32-7 (A) and (B) are either normal reach loss or super reach loss depending on the set value, except for non-reach loss. The determination values are assigned so that the ratio (that is, the balance between normal reach loss and super reach loss) is different. Specifically, in the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 32-7(A), the ratio of the normal reach loss becomes significantly higher in the order of the setting values “1”<“2”<“3” (this example). In the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 32-7(B), the normal reach loss occurs in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3”. Is slightly increased (in this example, increased by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency between the normal reach loss and the super reach loss. Further, the difference in selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period can be increased.

In the characteristic part 012IW, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value, but this is because the execution rates of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss are different according to the set value, and The concept includes that the execution ratios of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss are different, and that the execution ratio of only the normal reach loss is different according to the set value.

In the characteristic part 012IW, a common background image is displayed on the image display device 5 when any of the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 32-7(A) and (B) is used. Then, the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed. Further, when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 3, a common background image is displayed on the image display device 5 and variable display of the decorative pattern is performed. Note that the special background image may be displayed only during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on to when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on to when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example).

Not limited to the example of the characteristic part 012IW, for example, a special variation pattern suggesting a setting value (for example, a variation pattern in which the variation display of the decorative pattern is different from the normal pattern, and the setting value is 1 or 2) May be selected), so that the special variation pattern can be selected only during the special period. With such a structure as well, it is possible to provide a motivation to play a game during a special period, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

(Non-reach lost variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 32-8 is an explanatory diagram of a non-reach-miss variation pattern determination table. In this characteristic part 012IW, a plurality of types of non-reach-miss variation patterns having different variation times are provided, and when the variation pattern is determined to be non-reach-loss, it is further determined which of the non-reach-loss A to C is to be determined. Is configured. Not limited to such a configuration, for example, the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. It may be configured to determine whether or not.

As illustrated in FIG. 32-8, in the non-reach-miss variation pattern determination table, when the setting value is “1”, the rate of determination of non-reach-loss C (variation time 7 seconds) is high and the setting value is “2”. If the set value is “3”, the rate determined as non-reach miss B (variation time 9 seconds) is high. Is assigned a judgment value.

In the feature unit 012IW, when the set value is “1”, the rate of determination as non-reach loss C is high, and therefore the variation time at non-reach loss tends to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the rate of determination as non-reach loss A is high, and therefore the variation time at non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average variation time becomes longer in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3”.

The feature part 012IW is configured such that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit increases in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3”, but at the same time, the set value is “1”. It is also configured such that the average variation time becomes longer in the order of “<“2”<“3”. With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit is set to be high, the average fluctuation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed and the gambling probability becomes too high. Can be prevented.

In the characteristic part 012IW, the average variation time is configured to be different by varying the ratio of the non-reach loses A to C having different variation times according to the set value. It is also possible to provide a plurality of types of variation patterns other than reach loss (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) so that the variation time is different, and the selection ratio may be different depending on the set value. In addition, when a plurality of variation patterns (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) are provided so that the variation time is different, the time of the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern or the high-speed variation display is made different so that the effect such as production It is desirable that there is no difference in how they look.

Further, in the characteristic part 012IW, the average variation time is configured to be different depending on the set value, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the fixed decorative pattern (final decoration The period in which the stop symbol) is stopped and displayed may be different. With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball-out rate) is set to be high, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed. It is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.

In addition, in the characteristic part 012IW, the variation time is set for each of the non-reach loses A to C, and the proportion of which of the non-reach loses A to C is determined is different for each set value, so that the big hit is won. When the probability (ball output rate) is set high, the average fluctuation time is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern is not limited to such a configuration but is set for each set value. The fixed time may be fixed, and the variation time may be longer when the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit is higher.

The characteristic part 012IW is provided with a variation pattern for shortening, which has a shorter variation time than other variation patterns. For example, a variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss (variation time of 1.5 seconds) is provided that is shorter than the non-reach loss A (variation time of 9 seconds). Then, this shortening variation pattern is configured to be used, for example, when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more. In such a configuration, when the number of reserved memories has reached the upper limit or is in a state close to the upper limit, this state is canceled and variable display is efficiently performed (that is, the game is efficiently advanced). ) Is intended. Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more. Therefore, in the characteristic unit 012IW, the shortening variation pattern used when the number of reserved storages is equal to or larger than the predetermined number has a common variation time regardless of the set value. Note that, regardless of the configuration of the present characteristic unit 012IW, the fluctuation time for shortening, which is used when the number of reserved memories is equal to or larger than the predetermined number, may be changed according to the set value.

(Setting confirmation process, setting change process)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the main feature unit 012IW will be described. 32-9 to 32-11 are flowcharts showing the game control main processing in the characteristic unit 012IW. Note that the processing of steps IWS001 and S002 in the characteristic unit 012IW is the same as the processing of steps S1 and S2 shown in FIG.

When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 103 sets the time until the effect control means (specifically, the first effect control CPU 012IW120a, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) is activated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. A production control means start waiting timer for measuring is set (step 012IWS003). In this case, the effect control means start waiting timer is set to a sufficient time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine until the first effect control CPU 012IW120a and the second effect control CPU 012IW120b are activated. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means start waiting timer (step 012IWS004), and confirms whether the value of the effect control means start waiting timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 012IWS005). If the value of the production control means start waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to step 012IWS004 and the processes of steps 012IWS004 to S005 are repeatedly executed. If the value of the production control means start waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 012IWS006.

By executing the processes of steps 012IWS003 to S005, the process from step 012IWS006 is executed after waiting until the first effect control CPU 012IW120a and the second effect control CPU 012IW120b are activated, and the setting value is changed or confirmed, and the RAM is executed. Initialization and recovery processing are performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a set value command, an initialization designation command, and a command for restoration described later are transmitted before the first effect control CPU 012IW120a and the second effect control CPU 012IW120b are activated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the command from being missed.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the RAM clear flag indicating that the clear switch has been pressed when the power to the gaming machine was turned on (step 012IWS006).

In this example, the RAM clear flag is not cleared in the power-off process (see step 012IWS031) described later, but the RAM clear flag is cleared once in step 012IWS006 when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, and then the clear switch is set. If so, the RAM clear flag is newly set (see steps 012IWS016 and S022), but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, if the RAM clear flag is also cleared when the power-off process is executed, and then the clear switch is set when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the RAM clear flag is newly set. Good.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same processing as step S4 (step 012IWS007). Specifically, in step 012IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 012IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step 012IWS012.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 012IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs the data check of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) by the same process as step S5, and the data is normal. It is determined whether or not (step 012IWS008). In step 012IWS008, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal. When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 012IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step 012IWS010.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 012IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the RAM 102 is a value other than the set values “1” to “3”. (Step 012IWS009). If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of the set values “1” to “3”, the process proceeds to step 012IWS011.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (N in step 012IWS008) or when it is determined that the set value stored in the RAM 102 is a value other than the set values "1" to "3" (Y in step 012IWS009). The CPU 103 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the RAM 102 (step 012IWS010). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS012.

When the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of the set values “1” to “3” (N in step 012IWS009), the CPU 103 is executing the setting change process for changing the set value. It is confirmed whether or not the setting change flag indicating that is set (step 012IWS011). If the setting change flag is set (step 012IWS011; Yes), that is, if the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted due to power failure or the like during the change of the set value, the process proceeds to step 012IWS012.

In step 012IWS012, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 012IW090 is on (step 012IWS012). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 012IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the setting key 012IW051 is on (step 012IWS013). If the setting key 012IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 012IWS014). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 2 process (step 012IWS015).

In this example, the RAM clear processing includes a RAM clear 1 processing (see step 012IWS051) and a RAM clear 2 processing (see step 012IWS015) executed when a RAM abnormality occurs.

In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, the areas other than the area for storing performance display information such as the serial ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, and the area for storing the set value in the storage area of the RAM 102 are cleared, and the serial ratio and Information for performance display such as winning ratio, base, etc., and setting value information are not cleared and retained. Hereinafter, the storage area of the RAM 102 that is cleared by the RAM clear 1 process is referred to as a clear storage area 1.

In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 process, the storage area of the RAM 102 other than the area for storing the performance display information such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is cleared, and the performance ratio such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is displayed. Information is not cleared but retained. Further, in the RAM clear 2 processing, the value of the set value stored in the RAM 102 is also cleared. Hereinafter, the storage area of the RAM 102 that is cleared by the RAM clear 2 process is referred to as a clear storage area 2. Therefore, in this example, the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102 that is cleared by the RAM clear 2 processing is larger than the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102 that is cleared by the RAM clear 1 processing.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 012IWS016), and proceeds to step 012IWS025. The RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 012IW090 is off (N in step 012IWS012), the setting key 012IW051 is off (N in step 012IWS013), or the output signal from the clear switch is off ( In N of step 012IWS014, CPU103 performs control which transmits a setting value abnormality error command to CPU012IW120b for 2nd effect control (step 012IWS017).

Next, the CPU 103 shifts to the loop processing of steps 012IWS018 to S020. In the loop process, the CPU 103 executes a 4 ms wait process for measuring a wait time of 4 ms (step 012IWS018). Then, when the wait time of 4 ms elapses, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 012IWS019 and displays a predetermined error (step 012IWS019). For example, the CPU 103 controls the display monitor 012IW029 to display a display indicating that a RAM error has occurred (for example, a display of "E"). Further, the CPU 103 controls to externally output the security signal to an external device such as a hall computer via the external terminal board (step 012IWS020). Then, the processing from step 012IWS018 is repeatedly executed.

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS007 to S020, in the feature unit 012IW, when the backup RAM is not normal (N in step 012IWS007, S008, Y in step 012IWS009), power failure or the like occurs during the setting change. In the case (Y in step 012IWS011), the RAM is cleared and the set value after step 012IWS025 is set on condition that the setting key 012IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on while the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened. Can be changed. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened and the setting key 012IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, loop processing is executed, setting values cannot be changed, and gaming control does not proceed.

If the setting change flag is not set (step 012IWS011; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 012IWS021). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 012IWS022).

In this example, by executing the processing of step 012IWS022 and step 012IWS016, the RAM clear flag is set when the clear switch is first turned on when the gaming machine is powered on. Then, after that, before the timer interrupt is set and the timer interrupt process (game control process) is started, there are multiple scenes where it is confirmed whether the clear switch is detected when the power is turned on. However, instead of directly checking the state of the clear switch, by checking whether the RAM clear flag is set or not, it is determined whether or not the clear switch is turned on when the power is turned on. (See steps 012IWS025, S034, S048).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 012IW090 is ON (step 012IWS023). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 012IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the setting key 012IW051 is on (step 012IWS024). If the setting key 012IW051 is turned on, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 012IWS025). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the CPU 103 controls to send a setting confirmation command indicating that the setting confirmation processing for confirming the set value is executed to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b (step 012IWS026). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS030.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 controls to send a setting change command indicating that the setting change process for changing the set value is to be executed, to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b ( Step 012IWS027). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (step 012IWS028). If the RAM abnormality flag is set (that is, if an abnormality in the RAM 102 is detected), the CPU 103 causes the setting value determination buffer (a storage area provided in the RAM 102 for storing the current setting value). The set value is set to "1" (step 012IWS029). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS030. At this time, the CPU 103 resets the RAM abnormality flag.

In addition, on the side of the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b, when receiving the setting confirmation command or the setting change command, control is performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed (for example, , A predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a decorative light emitter such as a decorative LED is caused to emit light in a predetermined mode). In this case, when the operation button for production such as the push button 31B is pressed on the side of the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b, "maintenance mode" is displayed and the mode is changed to the maintenance mode. It may be configured to do so. “Maintenance mode” means, for example, the date and time setting of the real-time clock 012IW126, the history of various error occurrences (record of when and what kind of error occurred), and the setting change history (when and when the setting value was changed or This is a mode in which you can check the record of the set value of. When the setting key 012IW051 is turned off and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are completed, the maintenance mode is also completed.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a 4 ms wait process for measuring a wait time of 4 ms (step 012IWS030). Then, when the wait time of 4 ms elapses, the CPU 103 shifts to step 012IWS031 and executes power-off processing (step 012IWS031). In the power-off process of step 012IWS031, the CPU 103 executes a process of detecting whether or not the power-off signal is output (whether or not it is in the ON state). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supply supplied to the gaming machine. Then, in the power-off process, when the CPU 103 detects that the power-off signal is output, the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop process for storing necessary data (for example, backup flag, checksum) in the backup RAM area. To do.

Next, the CPU 103 identifies the set value stored in the set value confirmation buffer, and displays the identified set value on the display monitor 012IW029 (step 012IWS032). Further, the CPU 103 controls the external output of the security signal to an external device such as a hall computer via the external terminal board (step 012IWS033).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 012IWS034). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the process directly proceeds to step 012IWS043.

If the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the setting change flag (step 012IWS035) and starts the setting change process. Next, it is confirmed whether or not the initial setting completion flag indicating that the value has been set in the clear switch buffer for the first time since the game machine was powered on (step 012IWS036). The clear switch buffer is provided in the RAM 102 and is a buffer for setting the input state (whether it is in the on state or the off state) of the clear switch. For example, in the clear switch buffer, a value of "1" is set when the clear switch is on, and a value of "0" is set when the clear switch is off. If the initial setting completed flag is set (if the value has already been set in the clear switch buffer for the first time since the game machine was powered on), the process proceeds to step 012IWS039.

If the flag set for the first time is not set (that is, if the value has not been set in the clear switch buffer once even after the game machine is powered on), the CPU 103 turns the clear switch buffer on. The value shown (for example, "1") is set (step 012IWS037). Further, the CPU 103 sets the initial setting completion flag (step 012IWS038).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the value currently set in the clear switch buffer in the previous clear switch buffer (step 012IWS039). The previous clear switch buffer is a buffer provided in the RAM 102 for setting the input state (whether it is on or off) of the clear switch confirmed last time (4 ms before in this example). For example, the previous clear switch buffer is set to a value of "1" when the previously confirmed clear switch is in the on state, and is set to a value of "0" in the off state.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms the current input state of the clear switch and sets the current input state of the clear switch in the clear switch buffer (step 012IWS040). Next, the CPU 103 turns the value previously set in the clear switch buffer OFF (for example, “0”) and turns the value set in the clear switch buffer ON (for example, “1”). It is confirmed whether or not (step 012IWS041).

If the value previously set in the clear switch buffer is off and the value set in the clear switch buffer is on, the CPU 103 updates the set value displayed on the display monitor 012IW029. It is displayed and stored in the set value determination buffer (update stored for the set value already stored) (step 012IWS042). For example, when "1" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 012IW029, the display on the display monitor 012IW029 is updated to "2" and the set value "2" is stored in the set value determination buffer. If "2" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 012IW029, the display on the display monitor 012IW029 is updated to "3" and the set value "3" is stored in the set value determination buffer. If "3" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 012IW029, the display on the display monitor 012IW029 is updated to "1" and the set value "1" is stored in the set value determination buffer.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 012IW051 is turned on (step 012IWS043). If the setting key 012IW051 remains on, the process proceeds to step 012IWS030, the processes of steps 012IWS030 to S043 are repeatedly executed, and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the setting key 012IW051 is off, the CPU 103 ends the setting confirmation process and the setting change process, and proceeds to step 012IWS044.

When the RAM clear flag is not set by executing the processing of the above steps 012IWS025 to S043 (that is, when the clear switch is not turned on when the game machine is powered on) (steps 012IWS025 and S034). N), the setting confirmation command is transmitted (step 012IWS026) and the setting confirmation process (particularly step 012IWS032) is performed, but the setting change process is not performed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear flag is set (that is, when the clear switch is turned on when the game machine is powered on) (step 012IWS025, Y in S034), a setting change command is transmitted (step 012IWS027). At the same time, a setting confirmation process (particularly step 012IWS032) and a setting change process (particularly 012IWS035 to S042) are performed.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 30 seconds) in the security information timer for setting the output period of the security signal (step 012IWS044). In this example, if the setting confirmation process or the setting change process is executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the external output of the security signal is started by executing the process of step 012IWS033. , The security information timer is set in step 012IWS044, and the information output process (step S23) is executed based on the value of the security information timer, so that the security signal continues until a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. And output to the outside.

On the other hand, in this example, the security signal is output to the outside even when a RAM abnormality occurs by executing the processing of step 012IWS020, but in this case, the power supply to the gaming machine is reset. The security signal is continuously output to the outside until it is done.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the setting change flag (step 012IWS045). Further, the CPU 103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 (step 012IWS046). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set set value to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b (step 012IWS047).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 012IWS048). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the process proceeds to the recovery process of step 012IWS049. The processing of steps 012IWS049 and S050 in the feature unit 012IW is the same as the processing of steps S6 and S7 shown in FIG.

If the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 1 process to clear the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102 (012IWS051). Note that the processing of steps 012IWS052 to S055 in this feature unit 012IW is the same as the processing of steps S9 to S12 shown in FIG.

FIG. 32-12 is an explanatory diagram of the processing that is executed when the power is turned on. In this characteristic unit 012IW, as shown in FIG. 32-12, when the setting key 012IW051 is turned on when the power is turned on (and the output signal from the door opening sensor 012IW090 is turned on), the clear switch is turned on. If so, the setting confirmation process (particularly step 012IWS032) and the setting change process (particularly 012IWS035 to S042) are executed, the initialization process (RAM clear 1 process (step 012IWS051)) is executed, and the clear switch is off. For example, only the setting confirmation process (particularly step 012IWS032) is executed and the restoration process (step 012IWS049) is executed. When the setting key 012IW051 is off when the power is turned on, if the clear switch is on, only the initialization process (RAM clear 1 process (step 012IWS051)) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, Only the restoration process (step 012IWS049) is executed.

Next, a display mode of the display monitor 012IW029 in the setting confirmation process and the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 32-13(A) and 32-13(B), when the power is turned off (power is cut off) by the operation of a clerk or the like in the game arcade, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reduced. When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor 012IW029 ends. When the big winning game is open during a big hit game or a small hit game at the timing of turning off the power, the big prize hole is closed by stopping the power supply to the solenoid 82.

Next, as shown in FIG. 32-13(C), when a store clerk or the like in the game arcade turns on the power while operating the clear switch (Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key 012IW051 is turned on. The setting check process is executed by the CPU 103 under the condition that the setting value is set, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 012IW029.

In the state where the set value is displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 in this way, as shown in FIG. 32-13(D), the CPU 103 detects the operation of the clear switch by the store clerk or the like in the game hall in the setting change process. Each time it is performed, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 is sequentially updated (for example, every time the clear switch is operated, it is updated as 1→2→3→1→... ). Further, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102.

Next, as shown in FIG. 32-13(E), the CPU 103 turns off the display monitor 012IW029 based on that the setting key 012IW051 is turned off by the operation of the clerk at the game hall or the like, thereby turning on the game hall. The clerk or the like is notified that the new set value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102.

Further, when the hold storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the hold storage is cleared. When the special winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 32-13(A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the RAM clear processing is executed when the setting is changed. Since the memory about the big hit is erased, the special winning opening remains closed. After that, the CPU 103 ends the setting change process and becomes in a state in which the game can be played, that is, the variation display result, the big hit type, the variation pattern determination lottery, the prize ball payout, and the like can be executed.

In addition, in the setting change processing in the characteristic part 012IW, the mode in which the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, as the initial display displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 in the setting change process, the setting value that is most unfavorable to the player (“1” in the case of this characteristic part 012IW) or the most advantageous to the player The set value (“3” in the case of this characteristic unit 012IW) may be displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 32-13, the setting value is displayed using the first display of the four-digit display on the display monitor 012IW029 when confirming or changing the setting value. Without being limited to this mode, for example, the second and subsequent displays on the display monitor 012IW029 may be used to display the set value. Further, for example, the set value may be displayed by performing a dedicated 4-digit display on the display monitor 012IW029. In this case, for example, if the set value is "1", the display monitor 012IW029 displays 4-digit "-S-1", and if the set value is "2", the display monitor 012IW029 shows "-S-2". May be displayed, or if the set value is "3", the display monitor 012IW029 may display "-S-3". Further, for example, the setting value may be displayed on all four-digit displays of the display monitor 012IW029. For example, if the set value is "1", the display monitor 012IW029 displays four digits of "1111", and if the set value is "2", the display monitor 012IW029 displays four digits of "2222". May be.

(Special symbol normal processing)
Next, the process of the special symbol normal process (step S110) in the main feature unit 012IW will be described. 32-14 and 32-15 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (the total number of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number) (step 012IWS171). For example, the count value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number is confirmed.

If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether the second pending storage number is 0 (step 012IWS172). For example, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the second pending storage number counter for counting the second pending storage number is 0. If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to data indicating "second" (step 012IWS173). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step 012IWS174).

By performing the processing of steps 012IWS172 to S174, in the characteristic portion 012IW, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in preference to the variable display of the first special symbol. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, according to the order of starting winnings in which the game balls win the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol It may be configured to execute and.

Next, in the RAM 102, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number of the special symbol pointer =1 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 012IWS175). Specifically, the CPU 103, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of reserved memories=1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=1 in the second reserved storage buffer. The data is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the content of each storage area (step 012IWS176). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and the storage area of each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, the CPU 103, in the case where the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages=n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved memory numbers (or the respective second reserved memory numbers) are always extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or, The second reserved memory number)=1, 2, 3, 4 and the order.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is decremented by 1 (step 012IWS177). The CPU 103 saves the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the second effect control board 012IW12b (step 012IWS178). In the characteristic part 112, as described above, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change process is executed when the power is turned on by executing the process of step 012IWS047. The setting value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started by the processing of 012IWS178.

In this example, the same setting value command is transmitted when the setting value command is transmitted in step 012IWS047 and when the setting value command is transmitted in step 012IWS178, but the setting value command is different. It may be configured to send a command. For example, in step 012IWS047, a command that directly specifies a setting value (for example, commands 9E01(H) to 9E03(H) according to setting values “1” to “3”) is transmitted, while in step 012IWS178, the setting value is set. It may be configured such that the identifiable fluctuation pattern command is transmitted and the fluctuation pattern commands are prepared for the number of set values (for example, when the set value is “1”, commands 1C00(H) to The command 2C00(H)-is prepared as the variation pattern command at the setting value "2", and the command 3C00(H)-is prepared as the variation pattern command at the setting value "3".

Further, in the case of the above configuration, if the different variation pattern command is transmitted for each set value even when the same variation pattern is used, the total number of variation patterns×the number of set values (3 in this example) ) Change pattern command is required, which may increase the data capacity. Therefore, for example, the set value command may be transmitted only when a specific variation pattern is used, and only the variation pattern commands corresponding to the specific variation pattern may be provided with the variation pattern commands for the number of set values. Good. In this case, for example, the set value command is transmitted only when the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation having the highest output frequency is used, and only the fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation are changed pattern commands corresponding to the number of set values. May be provided.

Further, in this example, the same set value command is sent as the set value command (see step 012IWS047) sent when the power is turned on and the set value command (see step 012IWS178) sent when the fluctuation starts. It is not limited to various forms. For example, the set value command for power-on and the set value command for start of fluctuation may be configured as separate commands, and different set value commands may be transmitted at power-on and at the start of fluctuation. Good.

Further, in this example, the case where the setting value command is transmitted separately from the fluctuation pattern command at the start of fluctuation is shown, but it is configured to transmit the effect control command that combines the fluctuation pattern command and the setting value command. Good. In this case, for example, even if the variation pattern command specifies the same variation pattern A, if the setting value is "1", the variation pattern command A-1 is transmitted, and if the setting value is "2", The variation pattern command A-2 may be transmitted, and the variation pattern command A-3 may be transmitted when the set value is “3”.

Further, the game control microcomputer 100 side is configured to be able to output the same fluctuation pattern command (for example, fluctuation pattern command A) regardless of the set value, and the first effect control CPU 012IW120a and the second effect control CPU 012IW120b side It may be configured such that which fluctuation pattern is selected and the selection ratio thereof are different depending on the setting value of For example, if the setting value is 1, the variation pattern A-1 is selected or the variation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, and if the setting value is 2, the variation pattern A-2 is selected or the variation pattern A-2 is high. The variation pattern A-3 may be selected at a rate, or if the setting value is 3, the variation pattern A-3 may be selected at a high rate. In this case, for example, the variation patterns A-1 to A-3 may have the same variation time, but may be configured to have different presence/absence of pseudo stations, number of pseudo stations, presence/absence of reach, and type. Further, in this case, for example, when the set value command is not normally received, the variation pattern A-1 is uniformly selected, or when the set value command is not normally received, a dedicated selection ratio The variation pattern may be selected with.

Further, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of the fluctuation is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect, and the set value command may be transmitted at the end of the fluctuation, for example.

In addition, the CPU 103 controls to send a background designation command to the second effect control board 012IW12b according to the current game state (step 012IWS179). In this case, for example, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a probability variation state background designating command in the case of the probability variation state, and controls to transmit a time saving state background designation command in the case of the time saving state, and is in the normal state. In this case, control is performed to send the normal state background designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result from the random number buffer area, and executes the jackpot determination module. The big hit determination module compares the predetermined big hit determination value and small hit determination value (see FIG. 32-5) with the random number value MR1, and if they match, determines to make a big hit or a small hit. The program to execute. That is, it is a program that executes the processing of the big hit judgment and the small hit judgment.

If the value of the random number value MR1 does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step 012IWS180), the CPU 103 performs a small hit determination process (step 012IWS181). Then, when it is decided to make a small hit (Y in step 012IWS181), the CPU 103 sets a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit (step 012IWS182), and proceeds to step 012IWS186.

If the random number value MR1 does not match either the big hit judgment value or the small hit judgment value (N in step 012IWS181), that is, if it is out of alignment, the process directly proceeds to step 012IWS186.

When the value of the random number value MR1 matches any of the jackpot determination values (Y in step 012IWS180), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot (step 012IWS183). Next, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 32-6) to identify the type corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area (“big hit type A , "Big hit type B" or "big hit type C") is determined as a big hit type (step 012IWS184).

Further, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 012IWS185). For example, when the big hit type is "big hit type A", "01" is set as the data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is "big hit type B", "02" is set as the data indicating the big hit type. When the big hit type is "big hit type C", "03" is set as data indicating the big hit type.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step 012IWS186). For example, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is a falling symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, for example, when the big hit flag is set, "7" which is a big hit symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. In addition, you may determine to the stop symbol of a different special symbol according to a big hit type. Further, for example, when the small hit flag is set, "5" which is a small hit symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 012IWS187).

(Production control main processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means in the characteristic unit 012IW will be described. 32-16 is a flowchart showing the effect control main processing in the characteristic unit 012IW. In this feature unit 012IW, the processing of steps 012IWS201 to S202 is the same as the processing of steps S71 to S72 shown in FIG. When the initial operation control process of step 012IWS202 is executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and stores the log information in the log area of the RAM012IW122b with the input date and time information as the power-on date and time (step 012IWS203).

Next, the processing of steps 012IWS204 to S208 is the same as the processing of steps S73 to S77 shown in FIG. When the effect random number updating process in step 012IWS208 is executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the effect mode change process for changing the effect mode (step 012IWS209).

In the present characteristic part 012IW, it is possible to control in three types of effect modes, ie, effect mode A to effect mode C, and, for example, the background screen of the image display device 5 is different depending on which effect mode is controlled. The types of characters that appear in the notice production and reach production are different. In the effect mode change process of step 012IWS209, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to change from the current effect mode to a different effect mode when a predetermined effect mode change condition is satisfied. For example, the effect mode may be changed based on the fact that a predetermined day or time has been reached based on the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126. Further, for example, the lottery process based on a random number may be executed to change the effect mode based on the decision to change the effect mode.

In step 012IWS209, when the second effect control CPU 012IW120b changes the effect mode, for example, the flag corresponding to the effect mode after the change may be set and the flag corresponding to the effect mode before the change may be reset. .. For example, when changing to the effect mode A, the effect mode A flag may be set and the effect mode B flag or effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the mode is changed to the effect mode B, the effect mode B flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or the effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode C is changed, the effect mode C flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or effect mode B flag before the change may be reset.

It should be noted that the method of changing the effect mode may be changed in a predetermined order such as effect mode A → effect mode B → effect mode C → effect mode A →. You may make it change at random from modes A-C.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes an error notification process for performing various error notifications (step 012IWS210). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls the maintenance mode during the setting confirmation, and executes the maintenance mode process for displaying the maintenance history screen and the setting change/confirmation history screen (step 012IWS211). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes a setting change time recording process for recording the date and time when the setting value is changed in the setting changing process (step 012IWS212). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes a current time setting process for setting the current time during the maintenance mode (step 012IWS213). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the power cut date recording process for recording the power cut date and time when the power cut occurs (step 012IWS214). Then, the process returns to step 012IWS204.

(Command analysis process)
32-17 and 32-18 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step 012IWS206). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 012IWS301). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step 012IWS302). When read, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 012IWS303). The reason why +2 is performed is that two bytes (one command) are read.

If the received effect control command is the setting value command (step 012IWS304), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b stores the setting value indicated by the received setting value command in the setting value storage area formed in the RAM 012IW122b. (Step 012IWS305). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a set value command reception flag indicating that the set value command has been normally received at least once after the power of the gaming machine is turned on (step 012IWS306). In the characteristic part 012IW, the setting value and the setting value command reception flag stored in the setting value storage area are reset in the initialization process (step 012IWS201) when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. And

In addition, in the characteristic part 012IW, the set value command is transmitted when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the setting change processing is performed, but the set value command is normally transmitted due to missing of the command or garbled data. If not received, the processing of step 012IWS305 is not executed and the set value is not stored in the set value storage area. However, in the characteristic part 012IW, even if the set value command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, since the set value command is transmitted for each variable display, the process of step 012IWS305 is performed based on the received set value command. It can be executed so that the set value is stored in the set value storage area.

Further, even if the set value command is received, the set value included in the set value command may be an abnormal value. Therefore, when the set value command is read on the second effect control CPU 012IW120b side, It may be configured to determine whether the set value included in the command is a normal value. For example, in this example, the setting value is configured to be set to any one of "1" to "3", but includes a value such as "5" or "10" that should not be set. If it is set, it may be configured to determine that the set value included in the set value command is abnormal. Moreover, for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b side stores the setting value indicated by the received setting value command, and when a new setting value command is received thereafter, the newly received setting value command is received. If the set value indicated by the command does not match the previously stored set value, it may be determined that the inconsistency has occurred, and the configuration may be determined to be abnormal. Then, even when it is determined that the set value included in the set value command is an abnormal value, it is assumed that the set value command is not normally received, and the effect is limited according to the processing method shown in the feature section 012IW. It may be configured to do so.

(Initial result setting)
In the feature unit 012IW, when the second design control board 012IW12b receives either the initialization designation command or the restoration command from the main board 11 in the command analysis process, the image display device 5 performs a predetermined initial operation. A control is performed to display a result (specifically, a combination of decorative patterns, which is displayed on the image display device 5 until the first variable display is started) (hereinafter, also referred to as an initial result presentation). ).

If the received production control command is the initialization designation command or the command at the time of restoration (step 012IWS307), the second production control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 012IWS308). .. If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, if the setting change process is executed and the set value command is normally received), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b stores the set value storage area in the RAM 012IW122b. Based on the stored setting value, using the initial hit determination table, even initial hits (for example, "246" and "224" etc.), which are combinations of even hits, and odd hits It is determined to be either an odd-numbered initial result that is a combination (for example, "135" or "113") and a special initial result that is a combination of decorative patterns including a special pattern (for example, a star pattern) (step 012IWS309). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS314.

32-19 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the initial result determination table. In Step 012IWS309, using the initial result determination table shown in FIG. 32-19(A), a lottery process based on a random number is performed in accordance with the allocation of the determination value according to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area. Determine the outcome. In the initial outcome determination table shown in FIG. 32-19(A), the odds of initial outcomes are determined to be higher in the order of set values “1”<“2”<“3”. Therefore, in the image display device 5 before the start of the game, if the odd initial number is displayed, it means that the setting has been changed, and an advantageous setting value compared to the case where the even initial number is displayed. Will be suggested to be set to. Further, as shown in FIG. 32-19(A), the special initial appearance may be decided only when the set value is "3". Therefore, if the special initial result is displayed on the image display device 5 before the game is started, it is determined that the setting has been changed and the setting value is “3”. With such a configuration, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game can be made interested, and the motivation for playing the game can be given from an early period of the business hours of the game store, and the interest can be enhanced.

If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed, but the set value command could not be received normally due to a command being missed or data being garbled), the second The effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 012IWS310). In addition, whether or not the effect mode A can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines that the set value is "1", and determines the initial result using the initial result determination table shown in FIG. 32-19(A) ( Step 012IWS311). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS314.

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS310 to S311, in the characteristic part 012IW, the setting value which is the most unfavorable setting when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is A. The initial result is determined to be "1". As shown in FIG. 32-19(A), with respect to the set value “1”, the odds of being determined as odd initial numbers are the lowest, and there is no case of being determined as special initial numbers. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a situation in which the player is discouraged by displaying an odd-numbered initial result or a special initial result even if a disadvantageous set value is set, thereby reducing the interest in the game. It is possible to prevent the decrease of.

If not the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 012IWS312). Whether or not it is the effect mode C can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b uses the initial effect determination table for effect mode C to determine the initial result (step 012IWS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS314.

32-19(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the initial result determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 32-19(B), in the initial result determination table for effect mode C, the odd initial initial result is determined as compared with the case of the setting value “3” that is most advantageous for the player. The percentage is low, and there is no case where it is decided to be a special initial result.

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS312 to S313, in the characteristic part 012IW, when the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is C, the disadvantageous set value is set. In spite of the fact that odd initial numbers and special initial numbers are displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls the image display device 5 to display the initial result determined in steps 012IWS309, S311, and S313 (step 012IWS314).

In addition, although it is described that the characteristic part 012IW performs control for displaying on the image display device 5, control for turning on the game effect lamp 9, control for outputting sound from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the like. The second effect control CPU 012IW120b does not directly control the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9, and the speakers 8L and 8R, but more specifically, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is the first effect control CPU 012IW120a. To the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9, and the speakers 8L and 8R. Then, on the side of the first effect control CPU 012IW120a, based on a command from the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9, and the speakers 8L, 8R are controlled to perform various effects and notifications. This also applies to other similar description portions in the present characteristic part 012IW.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines an initial result to be an even initial result and displays an image. The device 5 controls to display the even initial number (step 012IWS315).

By executing the processing of step 012IWS315, the present feature section 012IW uniformly displays even initial numbers when the set value command cannot be received normally and the production mode is B. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by displaying an odd initial number or a special initial number despite being set to an unfavorable set value, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. I have to.

Even if the setting value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the odd initial winning symbol may be determined at a low rate. In this case, for example, by using a table in which the determination rate of the odd-numbered initial winning symbol is set lower than the setting value “1” of the initial-numbering determining table shown in FIG. It may be configured to determine the eye pattern.

In this example, the case where the set value command is not normally received and the even initial number is uniformly displayed in the production mode B is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. .. For example, when the set value command cannot be received normally and the production mode is B, when the set value command cannot be received normally, such as the combination of the symbols "????" as the initial result. It may be configured to display a dedicated initial result. Any combination of symbols that does not suggest the set value in any form may be displayed as the initial result.

Further, the processing when the set value command is not successfully received (or when the set value is not normally stored) is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, when it is determined to be N in step 012IWS308, the setting value “1” may be stored in the setting value storage area as a default to determine the initial result. In addition, for example, a setting value dedicated for indicating that the setting value command could not be received normally (for example, setting value “4”) is stored in the setting value storage area to determine the initial result. Good.

If the received production control command is a setting value abnormality error command (step 012IWS316), the second production control CPU 012IW120b executes setting value abnormality error notification (step 012IWS317). For example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b displays a character display such as "A setting value error has occurred" on the image display device 5, or a voice or an error sound indicating the setting value error from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output or the game effect lamp 9 or LED is controlled to emit light in a predetermined error pattern. In this case, when the set value abnormality error is notified, the loudspeaker 8L, 8R outputs a sound with a maximum volume and an error sound, and the game effect lamp 9 and the LED emit light with the maximum brightness (for example, of a full-color LED). In this case, it is desirable to emit white light).

If the received production control command is a variation pattern command (production control command for designating a variation pattern) (step 012IWS320), the second production control CPU 012IW120b changes the received variation pattern command to the variation pattern formed in the RAM 012IW122b. The data is stored in the command storage area (step 012IWS321). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 012IWS322).

If the received production control command is a display result designation command (production control command for designating whether to make a big hit or small hit, big hit type, small hit type) (step 012IWS323), second effect The control CPU 012IW120b stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 012IW122b (step 012IWS324).

If the received production control command is a symbol confirmation designating command (production control command that designates that the stop symbol of the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed) (step 012IWS325), the second production control CPU 012IW120b sets the confirmation command reception flag. (Step 012IWS326).

If the received production control command is a big hit start designation command (a production control command that specifies the start of a big hit game) (step 012IWS327), the second production control CPU 012IW120b sets a big hit start designation command reception flag (step 012IWS328). ).

If the received effect control command is a big hit end designation command (effect control command that specifies the end of the big hit game) (step 012IWS329), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a big hit end designation command reception flag (step 012IWS330). ).

If the received effect control command is any other command, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b stores the received effect control command or sets a flag according to the received effect control command (step 012IWS331). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS301.

In addition, in the characteristic part 012IW, if the setting change process is not executed when the power is turned on, the odd-numbered initial result is not displayed. However, the odd-numbered initial result may be displayed. Good. Also in this case, the odd number initial odds may be determined differently according to the set value (that is, the set value may be suggested).

Further, for example, instead of or in addition to the odd-numbered initial number and even-numbered initial number, an initial number that deny the possibility of a specific setting value (for example, the possibility of a setting value of 1 is denied, A value 2 or a set value 3 is confirmed), an initial result that a specific set value is confirmed, or the like may be provided and displayed according to the set value. For example, in the case of the set value 1, when the specific initial result is displayed by not determining the specific initial result, the possibility of the set value 1 is denied, and the set value 2 or It is decided that the set value is 3. Further, for example, by setting the specific initial result to be determined only in the case of the setting value 3, when the specific initial result is displayed, it is confirmed that the setting value is 3. .. Further, when determining the initial outcome, one of these initial outcomes may be determined by lottery. In this case, the proportion determined according to the set value may be different.

(Setting suggestion production)
In the present characteristic part 012IW, the setting value is configured to be changeable, and as a setting suggesting effect that suggests the setting value, a pre-game suggesting effect that is executed before the start of the game, the above-mentioned initial appearance effect, during the game (for example, It is configured to be able to execute suggestion during game executed during display of variation of ornamental pattern, setting suggestion based on the determination tendency of the variation pattern described above, and suggestion during big hit during big hit (for example, during big hit game) Has been done. It should be noted that, in the feature unit 012IW, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect can be executed by a plurality of kinds of effect modes each having a different suggestion reliability. The reliability of suggestion may be different for each. For example, the reliability of suggestion may be higher in the order of pre-game suggestive effect> suggestive effect during big hit> suggestive effect during game, or pre-game suggestive effect> suggestive effect during game> suggestive effect during big hit. The reliability of suggestion may be higher in the order of suggestive effect during game> suggestive effect during big hit> suggestive effect before game, or suggestive effect during big hit> suggestive effect during game> suggestive effect before game. Moreover, you may comprise so that the execution ratio of each setting suggestion production can be set. For example, the manager of the gaming machine does not execute some or all of the setting suggestion effects (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect or an initial appearance effect in which setting change is suggested), or an execution rate. The setting may be changed to lower (or increase). For example, the setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the setting related to the setting suggestion effect is set by operating the operating means such as the push button 31B or the operating means such as the switch provided inside the gaming machine (only the administrator can operate). May be changed.

(Variable display start wait processing)
32-20 is a flowchart of an example of the variable display start waiting process. In the variable display start waiting process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 012IWS501).

When the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to end the customer waiting demonstration effect if it is being executed (step 012IWS502, step 012IWS503).

Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the variation pattern command reception flag (step 012IWS504), updates the value of the effect process flag to "1" (step 012IWS505), and ends the variable display start waiting process.

If the variation pattern command reception flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b does not execute the customer waiting demonstration effect (N in step 012IWS506), and the time measurement result by the time measuring means matches the predetermined condition. It is confirmed whether or not (step 012IWS507). In step 012IWS507, for example, when a timer (for example, set to 30 seconds) set when the previous variable display (display result “miss”) ends, it is determined that the predetermined condition is met. Also, when the timer is not set (that is, after the power is turned on, the variable display has not been executed even once and before the game starts), it is determined that the predetermined condition is met. In other words, if the variable display is not executed for a predetermined period of time (and is not controlled to the big hit game state) or before the game is started, the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the customer waiting demonstration effect is performed by the process described later. Will be executed.

If the result of timing by the timing means matches the predetermined condition, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0 (step 012IWS508). That is, in step 012IWS508, it is confirmed whether the game has not started yet. Whether or not the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0, specifically, a number-of-changes counter for counting the number of times the decorative display is changed and displayed after the game machine is powered on, which will be described later. It can be determined by checking whether the value of (step 012IWS603) is 0 or not.

If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 012IWS509). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, if the set value command is normally received), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 012IW122b. Then, the presence/absence of execution of the pre-game suggestive effect and the effect mode when the pre-game suggestive effect is executed are determined using the pre-game suggestive effect determination table (step 012IWS510). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS515.

In this characteristic part 012IW, when the customer waiting demonstration effect of the aspect including the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect aspect is executed, the decoration lamp becomes the first special color (blue) different from the normal color (for example, white). When the customer waiting demonstration effect of the mode including the pre-game suggestive effect of the second effect mode is controlled, the decoration lamp is controlled to the second special color (red), and the pre-game suggestive effect of the third effect mode is performed. When the customer waiting demonstration effect of the aspect including is executed, the decoration lamp is controlled to the third special color (rainbow color).

32-21 is an explanatory view showing an example of the pre-game suggestive effect determination table. In Step 012IWS510, using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 32-21(A), a lottery process based on a random number is performed in accordance with the allocation of the determination value according to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area, Whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined. In the pre-game suggestive effect determination table of FIG. 32-21(A), determination values are assigned in order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3” so that the rate at which the pre-game suggestive effect is executed becomes higher. Has been. In addition, the determination value is assigned such that the proportion determined in the second effect mode becomes higher in the order of set values “1”<“2”<“3”. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and that the advantageous setting value is set by being executed in the second effect mode rather than in the first effect mode. Become. Further, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect, it is suggested that the setting has been changed when the power is turned on. Further, as shown in FIG. 32-21(A), the third effect mode may be determined only when the setting value is "3". Therefore, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, it is determined that the setting has been changed and that the setting value is “3”.

If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed, but the set value command could not be received normally due to a command being missed or data being garbled), the second The effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 012IWS511). In addition, whether or not the effect mode A can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. If it is the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines that the setting value is "1", and executes the pre-game suggestive effect using the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 32-21(A). Whether or not and the effect mode are determined (step 012IWS512). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS515.

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS511 to S512, in the characteristic unit 012IW, the setting value which is the most unfavorable setting when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode A is set. Whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined as being “1”. As shown in FIG. 32-21(A), with respect to the setting value "1", the ratio determined as the second effect mode is the lowest, and the ratio is not determined as the third effect mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode and the player is discouraged despite the disadvantageous set value being set. However, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

If not the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 012IWS513). Whether or not it is the effect mode C can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the production mode C, the second production control CPU 012IW120b uses the pre-game suggestive production determination table for the production mode C to determine whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestive production and the production mode (step 012IWS514). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS515.

32-21(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the pre-game suggestive effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 32-21(B), in the pre-game suggestive effect determination table for the effect mode C, it is determined to execute the pre-game suggestive effect as compared with the case of the setting values “2” and “3”. The ratio itself is low, the ratio determined as the first effect mode or the second effect mode is low, and the case is not determined as the third effect mode.

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS513 to S514, the characteristic portion 012IW sets a disadvantageous set value when the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is C. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode or the third effect mode to disappoint the player and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect including the pre-game suggestion effect determined to be executed in steps 012IWS510, S512, and S514 (step 012IWS515). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS517.

On the other hand, if it is not the effect mode C (that is, if the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b proceeds directly to step 012IWS516. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect is restricted from being executed.

By executing the processing of step 012IWS513, in the feature unit 012IW, when the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is B, the pre-game suggestion production is not executed. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed to disappoint the player despite the disadvantageous set value being set, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Even if the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect may be configured to be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, by using a table in which the execution ratio of the pre-game suggestive effect is set lower than the setting value “1” of the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. It may be configured to determine the presence or absence and the type of suggestive effect.

Note that the ratio is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 32-21(A), and only a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) among a plurality of effect modes may be executed at different rates depending on the set value. You can

In addition, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility that the setting value is a specific setting value may be denied. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, by setting the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) so that the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, the setting is performed. The possibility that the value is 1 is denied, and the setting value 2 or the setting value 3 is confirmed. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific set value. For example, when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only when the setting value is 3, It is decided that the set value is 3.

In the characteristic part 012IW, it is possible to execute the pre-game suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value, but this is the pre-game suggestive effect (the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the second effect mode according to the set value. (Including 3 effect modes), the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode differ according to the set value, and only the specific effect mode according to the set value. This is a concept that includes different execution rates.

It should be noted that the characteristic part 012IW is configured not to execute the pre-game suggestive effect when the setting is not changed when the power is turned on and the setting value command has not been received yet. Not limited to this, the pre-game suggestion effect may be executable even when the setting is not changed. In this case, the presence/absence of execution of the pre-game suggestive effect and the effect mode when executing the effect may be determined at different rates depending on whether the setting is changed or not.

For example, FIG. 32-21(C) is a pre-game suggestive effect determination table used when a command for restoration is received. Comparing the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 32-21(A) and the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 32-21(C), when the command at the time of restoration is received, that is, the setting change When not performed, the pre-game suggestive effect is executed at a lower rate and the difference in the execution rate between the set values is smaller than when the setting is changed. By doing so, the reliability of the suggestion by the pre-game suggestive effect can be made different between when the setting is changed and when the setting is not changed.

If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is not 0, the CPU 120 performs control to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect including the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect (excluding the pre-game suggestion effect) (step 012IWS516).

When the process of step 012IWS516 is executed, for example, in the image display device 5, an execution history showing the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect (the suggestion effect during the game or the suggestion effect during the big hit) and the execution content (the effect mode at the time of execution) A customer-waiting demonstration effect in which information is displayed is executed. When the processing of step 012IWS516 is executed, the customer waiting de-effect is executed, and when a predetermined operation (for example, the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) is performed during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect, The image display device 5 may display execution history information of the setting suggestion effect. In addition, on the side of the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b, the number of executions and the content of execution of setting suggestion effects (initial appearance effect, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, big hit suggestion effect, etc.) It is also possible to store the information indicating (the effect mode at the time of execution), and to be able to execute the effect of inferring the set value from the information and informing. It should be noted that this effect is to notify the expected setting value (or estimated setting value) calculated based on a predetermined reference from the execution status of the setting suggestion effect, not to notify the actual setting value. ..

In the feature part 012IW, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only before the game is started by the processing of steps 012IWS508 to 012IWS515. Further, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect is shown during the customer waiting demonstration effect by the processing of step 012IWS516, but the information regarding the pre-game suggestion effect is excluded. With such a configuration, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game can be made interested, and the motivation to play the game can be given from the early hours of the business hours of the game store, and the interest can be increased. .. Not limited to the example of the characteristic part 012IW, for example, using the real-time clock 012IW126 or the like, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only in a predetermined time period (for example, from 9 am to 11 am). May be. Further, the execution history information of the setting suggestive effect may not include information about the suggesting effect during game in the special period.

In addition to the configuration of the present characteristic unit 012IW, the number of executions and execution contents of the setting suggestion effect is accumulated as execution history information, and at the end of the game, the image display device 5 includes two-dimensional execution history information as described later. It may be configured to display a code or the like. In addition, when a player uses a mobile terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function to photograph a two-dimensional code displayed on a gaming machine and sends it to a web server on the Internet, the web server is based on the received information. The game history of the player may be managed, and a process of giving a predetermined privilege according to the game history may be performed. The player may access the Web server using the mobile terminal (or analyze the two-dimensional code) to acquire the execution history information and display the execution history information on the display device included in the mobile terminal. Further, the player may use a mobile terminal to read a two-dimensional code including the execution history information, so that a setting suggestive image suggesting a set value may be displayed on a display device included in the mobile terminal. For example, a setting value that is estimated based on a predetermined reference is calculated from the execution history information, and a setting suggestion image that suggests the calculated setting value (just an estimation and different from the actual setting value) is displayed. May be.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not it has been detected that the game end operation has been performed by the player (step 012IWS517). For example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B, confirms whether or not it has been detected that the option for ending the game has been selected and the determination operation has been performed. .. If it is detected that the game ending operation has been performed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b extracts log information from the log area of the RAM 012IW122b, and the extracted log information (for example, the log information of the probability change failure date and time described later). A two-dimensional code including is generated (step 012IWS518). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to display the generated two-dimensional code on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS519), and ends the variable display start waiting process.

Although the characteristic part 012IW describes that an operation is performed as detection or the like, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b does not directly input the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B. More specifically, first, the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B are input on the side of the first effect control CPU 012IW120a, and the second effect control CPU 012IW120b passes through the first effect control CPU 012IW120a. A command indicating that the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B has been operated is input. This also applies to other similar description portions in the present characteristic part 012IW.

(Variable display start setting process)
32-22 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 012IWS601). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b displays the decorative pattern according to the variation pattern command read in step 012IWS601 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command). (Stop symbol) is determined (step 012IWS602). That is, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the process of step 012IWS602 to display the display result (decorative pattern) of the variable identification information according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. The display result determination means for determining the stop pattern) is realized. It should be noted that the second effect control CPU 012IW120b stores data indicating the determined stop design of the decorative design in the decorative design display result storage area. In step 012IWS602, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. Good.

In step 012IWS602, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a probability variation big hit, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines a combination of decorative symbols in which the three symbols are arranged in the same odd number as the stop symbol. .. Further, for example, when the received display result designating command indicates a normal big hit (non-probability variation big hit), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are arranged in the same even number as the stop symbol. To decide.

In addition, when the received display result designation command indicates a small hit, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b uses a combination of ornamental designs of the small hit design according to the small hit type designated by the display result designation command. decide. In this example, in the case of the small hit type A, the combination of "135" is determined as the small hit symbol, and in the case of the small hit type B, the combination of "357" is determined as the small hit symbol, and the small hit. When the type is C, the combination of "579" is determined as the small hit symbol.

Further, when the received display result designation command indicates a deviation, a combination of decorative patterns other than the above is determined. However, when the reach effect is involved, the combination of the decorative patterns in which the left and right two patterns are aligned is determined.

When the pseudo pattern is specified by the variation pattern command, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, in step 012IWS602, the chance eye symbol (for example, “223” or “445”) as the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo pattern. In this way, a combination of a jackpot pattern that does not reach and a pattern in which one symbol is deviated) is also determined.

The second effect control CPU 012IW120b extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to stop the decorative symbol. Determine the design. That is, the stop design is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative designs corresponding to the numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b adds 1 to the value of the variation number counter for counting the number of times that the variation display of the decorative pattern has been performed since the game machine was powered on (step 012IWS603). In the characteristic part 012IW, the value of the variation counter is reset in the initialization process (step 012IWS201) when power supply to the gaming machine is started, and is changed when the game machine is powered on. It is assumed that the value starts from 0.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes an in-game suggestion effect determination process for determining the presence/absence of an in-game suggestion effect and an effect mode (step 012IWS604).

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b selects a process table corresponding to the in-game suggestive effect if the variation pattern and execution of the in-game suggestive effect are determined (step 012IWS605). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 012IWS606).

The process table is a table in which process data that the second effect control CPU 012IW120b refers to when performing control of the effect device is set. That is, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls the effect devices (effect parts) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data and the like indicating the form of each variation constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern are described. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, the process timer set value is set with the change time in the form of the change. The second effect control CPU 012IW120b refers to the process table, and performs control to display the decorative pattern in a variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM 012IW121b of the second effect control board 012IW12b. Further, the process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

In the process table used when performing effect control for a variation pattern involving reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of variation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating display is set. It should be noted that instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the images for displaying the symbols are synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbols, the temporary stop symbols in the pseudo-relation and the sliding effect. May be.

If execution of the in-game suggestion effect is determined in the in-game suggestion effect determination process of step 012IWS604, a process table including the in-game suggestion effect is selected in step 012IWS605, and step 012IWS607 is selected according to the selected process table. By performing the variable display effect production process (step S172), the in-game suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), effect device (image display device 5 as effect parts, effect parts. Control of the various lamps and the speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts is executed (step 012IWS607).

In the characteristic part 012IW, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed by the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command in a one-to-one manner. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern command.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets, in the variation time timer, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command (step 012IWS608). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b updates the value of the effect process flag to "2" (step 012IWS609), and ends the variable display start setting process.

(During game suggestion production decision processing)
FIG. 32-23 is a flowchart showing an example of in-game suggestive effect determination processing (step 012IWS604). The game suggestion effect determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the in-game suggestion effect determination process, if the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is in the special period (Y in step 012IWS701), the second in-play suggestion effect determination table is selected (step 012IWS702), and in the special period. If not (N in step 012IWS701), the second in-game suggestive effect determination table is selected (step 012IWS703). For example, when the setting change end command or the setting value command is received, the special period flag is set, and when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), the special period flag may be reset. For example, by checking the state of the special period flag, it is possible to confirm in step 012IWS701 whether or not the special period is in progress.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 012IWS704). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, if the set value command is normally received), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 012IW122b. Then, using the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table, the presence/absence of execution of the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode when executing it are determined (step 012IWS705).

32-24(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a first in-game suggestive effect determination table used in the special period, and FIG. 32-24(B) is a second in-game suggestive effect used in the non-special period. It is explanatory drawing which shows a determination table.

In the first and second in-game suggestive effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 32-24(A) and (B), the in-game suggestive effect is executed in the order of the setting values “1”<“2”<“3”. The determination value is assigned so that the rate of being performed is high. With such a configuration, the suggestion during game is executed, so that it is suggested that the advantageous setting value is set.

As for the second effect mode (appearance of the mini characters A and B), the ratio of being executed in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3” is high, and the first effect mode (appearance of the mini character A). The determination value is assigned so that the difference in the execution ratio between the set values becomes larger than that of the set value. That is, the second effect mode has a higher degree of reliability with respect to the setting value being more advantageous than the first effect mode.

Further, in the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 32-24(A) and (B), the in-game suggestion effect having a high reliability is executed only in the special period. Is configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide an incentive to play a game during a special period, and it is possible to enhance interest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 32-24(A) and (B), the third effect mode (the appearance of the character C) may be determined only when the setting value is “3”. Therefore, by executing the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, it is decided that the setting value is "3".

If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed, but the set value command could not be received normally due to a command being missed or data being garbled), the second The effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 012IWS706). In addition, whether or not the effect mode A can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. If it is the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines that the set value is "1" and uses the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table to determine whether or not to execute the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode. (Step 012IWS707).

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS706 to S707, in the characteristic unit 012IW, the setting value which is the most unfavorable setting when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode A is set. Whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined as being “1”. As shown in FIGS. 32-24(A) and (B), for the setting value “1”, the rate of determining to execute the in-game suggestive effect itself is low, and the rate of being determined as the second effect mode. Is the lowest, and is not determined to be the third effect mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation where the suggestion during game is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode and the player is discouraged despite the disadvantageous set value being set. However, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

If not the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 012IWS708). Whether or not it is the effect mode C can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b uses the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C to determine whether or not to execute the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode (step 012IWS709).

32-24C is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the in-game suggestive effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 32-24(C), in the in-game suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C, the proportion determined to execute the in-game suggestion effect is lower than in the case of the setting value “3”. There is no case where it is determined to be the third effect mode.

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS708 to S709, in the characteristic part 012IW, when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is C, the disadvantageous setting value is set. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the in-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode to disappoint the player and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

On the other hand, when it is neither the effect mode C (that is, the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b ends the process as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the in-game suggestion effect is restricted from being executed.

By executing the processing of step 012IWS708, in the present characteristic part 012IW, when the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is B, by not executing the in-game suggestion production, Even if a disadvantageous set value is set, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the suggestion during game is executed to disappoint the player and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Even if the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the in-game suggestion effect may be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution ratio of the in-game suggestive effect is set lower than the setting value “1” of the in-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIGS. 32-24(A) and (B) is used. Then, it may be configured to determine the presence or absence and the type of in-game suggestive effect.

Note that the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 32-24(A) and (B), and only a particular effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The ratio may be different.

In addition, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility that the setting value is a specific setting value may be denied. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, by setting the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) so that the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, the setting is performed. The possibility that the value is 1 is denied, and the setting value 2 or the setting value 3 is confirmed. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific set value. For example, when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only when the setting value is 3, It is decided that the set value is 3.

In the present feature part 012IW, it is possible to execute in-game suggestion effects at different rates according to the set value, but this is in-game suggestion effects (first effect mode, second effect mode and the second effect mode). (Including 3 effect modes), the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode differ according to the set value, and only the specific effect mode according to the set value. This is a concept that includes different execution rates.

In addition, in the characteristic part 012IW, the special mode and the non-special period are configured to be able to execute the in-game suggestion effect in a common mode (for example, the first effect mode), but the invention is not limited to such a configuration. Alternatively, the in-game suggestion effect in a different mode may be executable. For example, the size and color of the mini character A may be different between the special period and the non-special period.

Further, in the present characteristic part 012IW, whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode when executing it are configured to be different depending on whether it is a special period or a non-special period and a set value. However, in addition to such a configuration, for example, the variation time specified by the variation pattern, the presence/absence of the reach effect, the type of the reach effect, the presence/absence of the pseudo continuous effect, the type of the pseudo continuous effect, and the display result become a big hit. Depending on whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed, the effect mode when executing may be different.

For example, the in-game suggestion effect may be executable only when the change pattern includes at least the reach effect (that is, the change time is longer than that of the non-reach change pattern). Further, for example, in the variation pattern including the super reach B and the variation pattern including the super reach A having a higher degree of expectation than the super reach B, the latter is configured so that the in-game suggestive effect is executed at a higher rate. Alternatively, the reliability when the in-game suggestion effect is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the in-game suggestion effect is executed is high, and the reliability when the in-game suggestive effect is executed is high. It may be higher.

In addition, for example, in a variation pattern including a pseudo-relational effect and a variation pattern that does not include a pseudo-relational effect (or the number of pseudo-repetition times is smaller than the former), the former has a higher percentage of execution of the in-game suggestive effect. It may be set higher, the reliability when the in-game suggestion effect is executed may be higher, or the rate at which the in-game suggestion effect is executed becomes higher and The reliability may be increased.

Further, for example, in the variation pattern in which the display result is a big hit and in the variation pattern in which the display result is not a big hit, the former may be configured to have a higher ratio in which the suggestive effect during game is executed. The reliability when the medium suggestive effect is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the game suggestive effect is executed may be increased, and the reliability when the intermediate suggestive effect is executed may be increased. ..

(Direction determination process during big hit)
FIG. 32-25 is a flowchart of an example of the big hit midtime effect determination process. The big hit mid-game effect determination process is executed in the big hit opening pre-process (step S114). In the big hit mid-game effect determination process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 012IWS901). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, if the set value command is normally received), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM012IW122b. Then, the presence/absence of execution of the big hit medium suggestion effect and the effect mode when the effect is executed are determined (step 012IWS902). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS907.

In step S012IWS902, if the period from the start of the game until the variable display is executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) (hereinafter, also referred to as a specific period), the process shown in FIG. When the one big hit medium suggestive effect determination table is selected, and when it is not during the specific period, the second big hit medium suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 32-26(B) is selected. Then, based on the selected big hit medium suggestion effect determination table and the set value, the presence/absence of execution of the big hit medium suggestion effect and the effect mode when executing it are determined. The "game start time" here refers to the time when the first fluctuation display is started after the power is turned on, but it is not limited to this, and for example, the first fluctuation after the end of the last game. It may be the time when the display is started or the time when the first variable display is started after the end of the customer waiting demonstration effect. Further, in this characteristic part 012IW, the period from the start of the game to the variable display being executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) is set as the specific period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. However, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the period from the start of the game to the variable display being executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) may be set as the specific period. Further, for example, the specific period is divided into a plurality of periods, and a first specific period (a period from the start of the game until the variable display is executed 50 times) and a second specific period (the 51st change after the start of the game). It is also possible to use a big hit medium suggestive effect determination table in which the presence or absence of the big hit medium suggestive effect and the determination ratio of the effect mode are different between the display and the 100th variation display).

32-26 (A), (B) in the first and second big hit medium suggestive effect determination table, the set value "1" <"2" <"3" in the order of the big hit medium suggestive effect The determination value is assigned so that the rate of being performed is high. With such a configuration, the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, so that it is suggested that the advantageous setting value is set.

Further, in the second effect mode and the third effect mode, the ratio of execution in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3” is high, and the execution ratio between the set values in the specific period and the non-specific period is high. The determination value is assigned so that the difference between the two becomes large. That is, in the specific period, the big hit medium suggestion effect having higher reliability than the non-specific period is configured to be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide an incentive to play a game in a specific period, and to enhance the interest. Not limited to the configuration of the characteristic unit 012IW, the big hit medium suggestion effect (or a particular effect mode thereof) may be executed only in a specific period and not in a non-specific period.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 32-26 (A) and (B), the fourth effect mode may be determined only when the setting value is “3”. Therefore, the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed in the fourth effect mode, so that it is determined that the setting value is “3”.

In the present feature part 012IW, when the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed in the third effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 32-38 (A1), the decoration pattern to be a big hit is stopped and displayed on the image display device 5. After that, as shown in FIG. 32-38 (B1), a dialogue C image (“high setting!?”) 012IW102 is displayed.

When the big hit mid-game suggestive effect is executed in the fourth effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 32-38 (A1), after the decorative design to be a big hit is stopped and displayed, the figure is displayed. As shown in 32-39 (C1), the dialogue D image (“high setting confirmed”) 012IW105 is displayed.

If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed, but the set value command could not be received normally due to a command being missed or data being garbled), the second The effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 012IWS903). In addition, whether or not the effect mode A can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. If it is the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines that the setting value is "1" and uses the selected big hit medium suggestion effect determination table to determine whether or not to execute the big hit medium suggestion effect and the effect mode. (Step 012IWS904). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS907.

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS903 to S904, the present characteristic portion 012IW is the most disadvantageous setting value when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is A. Whether or not the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed and the effect mode is determined as being “1”. As shown in FIGS. 32-26 (A) and (B), the ratio determined as the second effect mode or the third effect mode is the lowest for the setting value “1”, and the fourth effect mode is determined. There is no case. With such a configuration, despite the disadvantageous set value being set, the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode to disappoint the player instead. It is possible to prevent the situation that the game is lost and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

If not the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 012IWS905). Whether or not it is the effect mode C can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines whether or not the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode by using the big hit medium suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 012IWS906). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS907.

32-26(C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a big hit mid-game suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 32-26 (C), in the big hit medium suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C, the rate itself for determining the big hit medium suggestion effect is low, and the setting value is “2” or “3”. Compared with, the ratio determined as the second effect mode or the third effect mode is low, and there is no case where it is determined as the fourth effect mode.

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS905 to S906, the characteristic portion 012IW sets a disadvantageous set value when the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode C is set. Despite that, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode and the player is rather discouraged, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. I have to.

On the other hand, if it is not the effect mode C (that is, if the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b proceeds directly to step 012IWS907. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, it is limited so as not to execute the suggestion effect during the big hit.

By executing the process of step 012IWS905, in the feature unit 012IW, when the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is B, by not executing the big hit medium suggestion production, Even if a disadvantageous set value is set, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a suggestion during a big hit is executed to disappoint the player, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Even if the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during the big hit may be configured to be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution ratio of the big hit medium suggestive effect is set lower than the setting value “1” of the big hit medium suggestive effect determination table shown in FIGS. 32-26 (A) and (B) is used. Then, it may be configured to determine the presence and type of the suggestive effect during the big hit.

Note that the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 32-26 (A) and (B), and only a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The ratio may be different.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 32-26(A), when a big hit occurs in the specific period, the suggestion effect during the big hit is always executed, but it may not be executed at a low rate. May be. In this case, the ratio of non-execution may be changed according to the set value. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 32-26(B), regardless of the set value, the proportion in which the big hit suggestive effect is not executed is configured to be the same, but if the proportion not executed is different depending on the set value. You may allow it.

Further, in the present characteristic part 012IW, when a big hit is made in a specific period, a big hit medium suggestion effect is executed as a setting suggestion effect, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, The setting suggestion effect (for example, a dialogue image suggesting the set value is displayed when the predetermined condition is satisfied) may be executed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition in the specific period. In this case, the predetermined condition may be satisfied, for example, when the number of times the reach effect or the pseudo continuous effect is executed reaches a predetermined number, or a specific super reach effect or a notice effect is executed.

In the present feature part 012IW, the big hit medium suggestive effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value, but this is the big hit medium suggestive effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, third effect mode). (Including the production mode and the fourth production mode), the execution ratios of the first production mode, the second production mode, the third production mode, and the fourth production mode are different according to the set value, and the set value. It is a concept including that the execution ratio is different only in a specific effect mode (for example, a third effect mode) according to.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines whether or not to execute the accessory effect (step 012IWS907).

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 32-38 (A1), it is assumed that the movable member 012IW101 is provided above the image display device 5. In such a configuration, when the accessory effect is executed, control for moving the movable member 012IW101 to the front surface of the image display device 5 is performed as shown in FIG. 32-38 (B2).

As shown in FIGS. 32-38 (A1) and (B2), when the accessory effect is executed, the movable member 012IW101 moves to the front surface of the image display device 5, so that the image display device 5 produces a suggestion during a big hit. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the position where the serif image is displayed. In the present feature part 012IW, since the big hit medium suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at different timings during the fanfare period in the big hit game, the movable member 012IW101 actually moved to the front surface of the image display device 5 is a big hit. The serif image displayed by the medium suggestion effect is not covered. However, during the fanfare period, when the movable member 012IW101 operates due to the effect production, the player's attention may be directed to the movable member 012IW101 and the dialogue image displayed by the big hit suggestion production may be overlooked. Therefore, in step 012IWS907, by using the character effect production determination table shown in FIG. 32-26(D), the character effect is not executed when the mid-hit suggestion effect is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the suggestive effect during the big hit from being difficult to recognize and reduce the interest. Further, with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the big hit mid-hugging suggestion effect from being difficult to recognize even if the big hit mid-hit suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at the same timing.

In addition, when the execution of the big hit medium suggestion effect is determined, the execution timing of either the big hit medium suggestion effect or the character effect is changed (for example, the character effect effect is performed during the fanfare period, and the big hit medium effect indication is performed. It may be performed during the ending period) to prevent the suggestive effect during the big hit from being difficult to recognize. Further, when execution of the big hit medium suggestion effect is determined, the operation mode of the movable member 012IW101 is changed (for example, control is performed so as not to stop at a position overlapping the serif image by the big hit medium suggestion effect), or the big hit. The display position of the serif image by the medium suggestion effect may be changed to prevent the big hit medium suggestion effect from being difficult to recognize. Further, when the execution of the suggestion effect during the big hit is determined, the execution rate of the accessory effect may be reduced to limit the execution of the accessory effect. Further, the execution of the character effect may be restricted only for a specific period. Further, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 32-26(D), the accessory effect may be executed at a low rate even when the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed.

Next, when the accessory effect is not executed (N in step 012IWS908), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines the presence or absence of the light guide plate effect (step 012IWS909).

Here, on the front surface of the image display device 5, a light-transmitting light guide plate 012IW103 capable of transmitting light and a light-emitting body provided so that light can be incident from an end surface of the light guide plate are provided, and the light guide plate 012IW103 is It is assumed that a reflector is provided by which a light-emitting body reflects light that has entered the inside of the light guide plate 012IW103 from the end face of the light guide plate 012IW103 and emits it to the front surface of the game machine. Then, it is possible to execute a light guide plate effect in which light is emitted from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate 012IW103 to the front surface of the game machine by causing the light emitting body to emit light. In such a configuration, when the light guide plate effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 32-38 (B3), light is emitted from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate 012IW103 to the front surface of the gaming machine, so that the “big hit” occurs. Appears. In addition, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the light guide plate effect.

In step 012IWS909, by using the light guide plate effect determination table shown in FIG. 32-26(E), light guide plate effects are executed at different ratios according to the presence or absence of the big hit suggestion effect and the effect mode when it is executed. It Specifically, when the suggestion during big hit in the first effect mode is performed, the ratio of the light guide plate effect being executed is high, and the suggestion during big hit in the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode. When the effect is executed, the ratio of the light guide plate effect executed is reduced. That is, when the big hit medium suggestion effect of the effect mode that is not suggested to be an advantageous setting value is executed, the light guide plate effect is executed at a high rate, and the big hit medium suggestion effect is configured to be difficult to visually recognize. There is. For example, as shown in FIG. 32-38 (B4), when the dialogue A image (“setting is...”) 012IW104 is displayed by the big hit medium suggestion effect of the first effect mode, the light guide plate effect is executed. If so, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the serif A image. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being deteriorated due to the suggestion during the big hit which is not desirable for the player. When the big hit medium suggestion effect of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is executed, the execution timing of either the big hit medium suggestion effect or the light guide plate effect is changed (for example, the light guide plate. The effect may be performed during the fanfare period, and the suggestion during the big hit may be performed during the ending period).

(Ending production process)
32-27 is a flowchart showing the ending effect process (step S177) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the ending effect process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step 012IWS951). The production period measurement timer is set based on the fact that all the rounds of the big hit game have been completed in the big hit midway production process (see step S176). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step 012IWS952).

When the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step 012IWS952), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 012IWS953), and the effect device (image display) according to the contents of the process data n. A process for controlling the device 5, the game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L, 8R, etc. is executed (step 012IWS954). For example, an effect of displaying that the jackpot is over or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 012IWS955), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 012IWS956). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step 012IWS957).

If the production period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step 012IWS952), the second production control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the jackpot game to be finished this time is a jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot (step 012IW958). Whether or not the probability variation is a big hit can be determined, for example, by checking the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area. If it is not the probability variation big hit (N in step 012IW958), the process directly proceeds to step 012IWS961.

If the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot is finished (Y in step 012IWS958), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the V winning designation command is received (step 012IWS959). If the V winning designation command has been received (Y in step 012IWS959), the process directly proceeds to step 012IWS961.

If the V winning designation command has not been received (N in step 012IWS959), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and logs the entered date and time information in the log area of the RAM 012IW122b as the probability change failure date and time. The information is stored (step 012IWS960). That is, in this case, the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is controlled for the big hit game based on the probability variation big hit, and the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is opened for a relatively long time (29.5 seconds in this example), Since it is a case where the game ball does not win the V winning area in the special variable winning device 012IW007b and is not controlled to the probability variation state, the log information is recorded as the probability variation non-establishment date and time. Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS961.

After that, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b updates the value of the effect process flag to "0" (step 012IWS961), and ends the ending effect process.

In this example, the case where the probability variation failure is detected and the log information is recorded in the ending period at the end of the big hit game is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, in this example, since the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is opened in the fourth round during the big hit game, at the end of the fourth round (when the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is closed after the fourth round). Alternatively, during the fifth round after the fourth round (during opening of the second special variable winning device 012IW007b of the fifth round), it may be configured to detect whether or not the probability variation is not established and record the log information. Good.

(Error notification process)
32-28 to 32-31 are flowcharts showing the error notification process (step 012IWS210). In the error notification process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first confirms whether or not the first left-handing notification flag indicating that the first left-handing notification is being executed is set (step 012IWS101). If the first left-handing notification flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines whether or not the second left-handing notification flag indicating that the second left-handing notification is being executed is set. Confirm (step 012IWS102).

If the second left-handing notification flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the big hit game is being executed (step 012IWS103). Whether or not it is during the big hit game, for example, the value of the effect process flag updated in the effect control process process is a value indicating the effect process during the big hit (step S176) to the ending effect process (step S177). It can be determined by checking whether or not there is. If the big hit game is not in progress, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not it is in the high base state (step 012IWS104). Note that whether or not the high base state is in effect is determined by, for example, whether or not a command capable of identifying that the high base state is in progress (for example, a probability variation state background designation command, a time saving state background designation command) has been received. It can be determined by doing.

If it is not in the high base state (that is, if it is in the low base state), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the gate passage designation command is received (step 012IWS105). If the gate passage designation command is received (that is, if passage of the game ball of the passage gate 012IW041 is detected), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b counts the number of game balls that have passed the passage gate 012IW041. 1 is added to the value of the gate passage counter (step 012IWS106), and it is confirmed whether the value of the gate passage counter after addition is 5 (step 012IWS107).

If the value of the gate passage counter is 5, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to start displaying the left-handed notification display on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS108). For example, the image display device 5 is controlled to start displaying a character display such as “Aim for the left!”. Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the first left-handing notification flag (step 012IWS109). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to a predetermined period (5 seconds in this example) in the first left-handing notification timer for measuring the execution period of the first left-handing notification (step) (step 012IWS110). That is, in this case, it is a case where the left hitting operation is originally performed because it is not in the low base state and not in the big hit game, but the total of the passage of the game balls to the passage gate 012IW041 provided in the right area of the game area. Since it is detected that the right-handed operation has been performed five times, the first left-handed notification that prompts the player to perform the left-handed operation is performed.

If the value of the gate passage counter after addition is not 5, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether the value of the gate passage counter after addition is 10 (step 012IWS111). If the value of the gate passage counter is 10, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to start displaying the left-handing notification display on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS112). For example, the image display device 5 is controlled to start displaying a character display such as “Aim for the left!”. In this case, for example, a larger left-handed notification display may be displayed as compared with the case where the first left-handed notification is executed. Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to start all lighting of the game effect lamp 9 (step 012IWS113). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to start outputting a predetermined notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 012IWS114). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the second left-handing notification flag (step 012IWS115). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to a predetermined period (33 seconds in this example) in the second left-handing notification timer for measuring the execution period of the second left-handing notification (step) (step). 012IWS116). That is, in this case, when the low base state and the big hit game are not being performed, the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 012IW041 further provided in the right area of the game area is detected 10 times in total. Therefore, the second left-handing notification that prompts the player to perform a left-handing operation is performed. If the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is set, the first left-handing notification flag and the first left-handing notification timer are reset.

In this example, the execution condition of the second left-handed notification is established based on the detection of the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 012IW041 10 times in total, while the execution condition of the second left-handed notification is satisfied, while the execution of the game ball to the passage gate 012IW041 is Since the execution condition of the first left-handing notification is satisfied based on the detection of the passage of a total of 5 times, the second left-handing notification of the second left-handing notification is established based on the satisfaction of the two first left-handing notification execution conditions. The execution condition is satisfied.

Further, in this example, the case where the execution condition of the left-handed notification is established based on the detection of the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 012IW041 5 or 10 times in total is shown. It is not limited to various forms. For example, when the second starting winning opening is provided in the right area of the game ball, if the winning of the gaming ball into the second starting winning opening is detected even once, the left hit notification execution condition is satisfied. Alternatively, the left-handed notification may be executed.

Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and stores the log information in the log area of the RAM 012IW122b as the left-handed notification date and time (step 012IWS117). As described above, in the present example, there are two types of left-handing notification, that is, the first left-handing notification and the second left-handing notification, but only when the second left-handing notification having a higher degree of importance is executed, the log is output. The log information is not recorded when the first left-handing notification having a low importance is recorded as the information.

If the gate passage designation command is not received (N of step 012IWS105, that is, if passage of the game ball of the passage gate 012IW041 is detected, is the second effect control CPU 012IW120b receiving the winning opening winning designation command? If the winning prize winning designation command is received (that is, if the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 10 is detected), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, The value of the gate passage counter is cleared to 0 (step 012IWS119) That is, the fact that the winning prize winning designation command is received means that the gaming ball is won to the general winning opening 10 provided in the left area of the playing area. Is detected, and the player is performing a left-handed operation, so the value of the gate passage counter is cleared to zero.

Also, when the big hit game (Y in step 012IWS103) or in the high base state (Y in step 012IWS104), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b moves to step 012IWS119 and the gate passage counter The value is cleared to 0 (step 012IWS119). That is, the fact that the player is in the big hit game or in the high base state means that a right-handed operation is performed, so the value of the gate passage counter is cleared to zero.

If the first left-handing notification flag is set (Y in step 012IWS101), that is, if the first left-handing notification is being executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b notifies the first left-handing notification. It is confirmed whether or not the timer has timed out (step 012IWS120). If the first left-handing notification timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to end the display of the left-handing notification display on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS121). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the first left-handing notification flag (step 012IWS122).

When the second left hitting notification flag is set (Y in step 012IWS102), that is, when the second left hitting notification is being executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b causes the second left hitting notification. It is confirmed whether or not the timer has timed out (step 012IWS123). If the second left-handing notification timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to end the display of the left-handing notification display on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS124). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control for ending all lights of the game effect lamp 9 (step 012IWS125), and also performs control for ending output of a predetermined notification sound from the speakers 8L, 8R (step 012IWS126). ). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the second left-handing notification flag (step 012IWS127). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b clears the value of the gate passage counter to 0 (step 012IWS128).

In this example, the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 10 is detected, the big hit game is being performed, the high base state is being set, and the second left-handing notification period (33 seconds) is set. Although the case where the value of the gate passage counter is cleared to 0 based on the elapsed time is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the value of the gate passage counter is cleared to 0 on the basis of the fact that the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 10 is detected, the big hit game is being performed, and the high base state is being made. The value of the gate passage counter may not be cleared even after the notification period (33 seconds) for left-handed notification has passed, and various processing modes are possible.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the first full tank notification flag indicating that the first full tank notification is being executed is set (step 012IWS129). If the first full tank notification flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines whether or not the second full tank notification flag indicating that the second full tank notification is being executed is set. Confirm (step 012IWS130).

If the second full tank notification flag is also not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the full tank detection command is received (step 012IWS131). When the full tank detection command is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines whether or not the full tank flag indicating that the full state of the hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is being detected is set. Confirm (step 012IWS132). If the full tank flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the full tank flag (step 012IWS133), and measures the duration of the ball hitting plate (lower plate) in the full state. A full tank timer is set (step 012IWS134).

If the full tank flag is set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether the value of the full timer is 10 seconds (step 012IWS135). If the value of the full tank timer is a value corresponding to 10 seconds (that is, if the hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) is in a full tank state for 10 seconds), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, The image display device 5 is controlled to start the display of the full tank notification display (step 012IWS136). For example, the image display device 5 is controlled to start displaying a character display such as "the lower plate is full!". Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the first full tank notification flag (step 012IWS137). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to a predetermined period (5 seconds in this example) in the first full tank notification timer for measuring the execution period of the first full tank notification (step). 012IWS138).

If the value of the full tank timer is not a value corresponding to 10 seconds, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether the value of the full tank timer is a value corresponding to 30 seconds (step 012IWS139). ). If the value of the full tank timer is a value corresponding to 30 seconds (that is, if the full state of the hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) continues for 30 seconds), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, The image display device 5 is controlled to start displaying the full tank notification display (step 012IWS140). For example, the image display device 5 is controlled to start displaying a character display such as "the lower plate is full!". In this case, for example, a larger full tank notification display may be displayed as compared with the case where the first full tank notification is executed. Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to start all lighting of the game effect lamp 9 (step 012IWS141). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to start output of a predetermined notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 012IWS142). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the second full tank notification flag (step 012IWS143). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to a predetermined period (33 seconds in this example) in the second full tank notification timer for measuring the execution period of the second full tank notification (step). 012IWS 144). The second effect control CPU 012IW120b, if set, resets the first full tank notification flag and the first full tank notification timer.

In the present example, when executing the second full tank notification, the case where all the game effect lamps 9 and a predetermined notification sound are output is shown as in the case of executing the second left-handing notification. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, either one of all the game effect lamps 9 or a predetermined notification sound may be output, or only part of the game effect lamps 9 may be turned on. Good.

Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and stores the log information in the log area of the RAM 012IW122b as the input date and time information as the full tank notification date and time (step 012IWS145). As described above, in this example, there are two types of the full tank notification, that is, the first full tank notification and the second full tank notification, but only when the second full tank notification having a higher degree of importance is executed, the log is output. The log information is not recorded when the first full tank notification, which is recorded in the information and has low importance, is executed.

On the other hand, if the full tank detection command is not received (step 012IWS131 N), that is, if the full state of the hitting ball supply tray (lower plate) is not detected, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is set. For example, the full tank flag is reset and the full timer is reset (step 012IWS146).

When the first full tank notification flag is set (Y in step 012IWS129), that is, when the first full tank notification is being executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the first full tank notification. It is confirmed whether or not the timer has timed out (step 012IWS147). If the first full tank notification timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to end the display of the full tank notification display on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS148). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the first full tank notification flag (step 012IWS149).

When the second full tank notification flag is set (Y in step 012IWS130), that is, when the second full tank notification is being executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b causes the second full tank notification. It is confirmed whether or not the timer has timed out (step 012IWS150). If the second full tank notification timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to end the display of the left-handed notification display on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS151). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control for ending all lights of the game effect lamp 9 (step 012IWS152) and also performs control for ending output of a predetermined notification sound from the speakers 8L, 8R (step 012IWS153). ). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the second full tank notification flag (step 012IWS154). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the full tank flag and the full tank timer (step 012IWS155).

(Maintenance mode processing)
32-32 is a flowchart showing the maintenance mode process (step 012IWS211). In the maintenance mode process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first confirms whether or not the maintenance mode flag indicating that the maintenance mode is being set is set (step 012IWS451). If the maintenance mode flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the setting confirmation flag indicating that the setting is being confirmed is set (step 012IWS452).

If the setting confirmation flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the setting confirmation command is received (step 012IWS453). If the setting confirmation command is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to start displaying the setting confirmation display on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS454). For example, the image display device 5 is controlled to start displaying a character display such as “setting confirmation in progress”. Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the setting confirmation flag (step 012IWS455).

If the setting confirmation flag is set (Y in step 012IWS452), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines whether the push button 31B is turned on (specifically, the detection signal from the push sensor 35B is input. It is confirmed (step 012IWS456). If the push button 31B is turned on, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to start displaying the maintenance mode menu screen on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS457). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the maintenance mode flag (step 012IWS458).

As described above, by performing the processing of steps 012IWS452 to S458, in this example, the maintenance operation is performed based on the push button 31B being pressed while confirming the setting when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. The mode is controlled, and the maintenance mode menu screen is displayed.

If the push button 31B is not turned on (N in step 012IWS456), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the command for restoration is received (step 012IWS459). If the command for restoration is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control for ending the display of the setting confirmation display on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS460). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the setting confirmation flag (step 012IWS461). That is, the fact that the command for restoration is received during the setting confirmation means that the setting key 012IW051 is turned off by the player and the setting confirmation process ends (N in step 012IWS043, step 012IWS049). Control to end the display of the confirmation display.

If the maintenance mode flag is set (Y in step 012IWS451), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the player has performed maintenance history selection operation (step 012IWS462). .. For example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the maintenance history selection operation is detected based on the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B. If it is detected that the maintenance history selection operation has been performed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b extracts all log information from the log area of the RAM012IW122b (step 012IWS463). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls the image display device 5 to display a maintenance history screen including the extracted log information as history information (step 012IWS464).

If the maintenance history selection operation has not been detected (N in step 012IWS462), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not it is detected that the setting change/confirmation history selection operation has been performed by the player ( Step 012IWS465). For example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the setting change/confirmation history selection operation is detected based on the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B. If it is detected that the setting change/confirmation history selection operation has been performed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b extracts all log information for setting change and setting confirmation from the log information stored in the log area of the RAM012IW122b. (Step 012IWS466). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls the image display device 5 to display the setting change/confirmation history screen including the extracted setting change and setting confirmation log information as history information (step 012IWS467).

If it is not detected that the setting change/confirmation history selection operation is performed (N in step 012IWS465), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the command for restoration is received (step 012IWS468). .. If the command for restoration is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to erase the maintenance mode menu screen, the maintenance history screen, and the setting change/confirmation history screen in the image display device 5 (step 012IWS469). .. Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the maintenance mode flag (step 012IWS470). That is, the fact that the command for restoration is received during the setting confirmation means that the setting key 012IW051 is turned off by the player and the setting confirmation processing is completed (N in step 012IWS043, see step 012IWS049). Control to end the mode.

In this example, the case where the setting key 012IW051 is determined to be turned off based on the reception of the command at the time of restoration and the maintenance mode is ended is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, in this example, since the setting value command is also transmitted when the setting key 012IW051 is turned off (see step 012IWS047), it is determined that the setting key 012IW051 is turned off based on the reception of the setting value command, and the maintenance mode is set. May be configured to end.

(Setting change time recording process)
32-33 is a flowchart showing the setting change time recording process (step 012IWS212). In the setting change time recording process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first confirms whether or not a setting change command has been received (step 012IWS801). If the setting change command is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and stores the log information in the log area of the RAM012IW122b with the input date and time information as the setting change start date and time (step 012IWS802). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a setting change command reception flag indicating that the setting change command has been received (step 012IWS803).

If the setting change command has not been received (N in step 012IWS801), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the setting confirmation command has been received (step 012IWS804). If the setting confirmation command is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126 and stores the log information in the log area of the RAM012IW122b as the setting confirmation start date and time (step 012IWS805). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the setting confirmation command reception flag indicating that the setting confirmation command has been received (step 012IWS806).

If the setting confirmation command has not been received (N in step 012IWS804), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the initialization designation command has been received (step 012IWS807). If the initialization designation command has been received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the setting change command reception flag is set (step 012IWS808). If the setting change command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process is not executed and only the initialization process is executed), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b outputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126. Is input and the log information is stored in the log area of the RAM 012IW122b using the input date and time information as the RAM clear date and time (step 012IWS809).

On the other hand, if the setting change command reception flag is not set (Y in step 012IWS808), that is, if both the setting change process and the initialization process are executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b stores the set value in the RAM012IW122b. The current setting value stored in the area is read (step 012IWS810). In the present example, when the setting change process is executed, the setting value command is transmitted before the initialization designation command (see steps 012IWS047 and S052), so that the setting value storage area of the RAM012IW122b has the latest value. The setting value of should be stored. Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, associates it with the read setting value, and stores the log information in the log area of the RAM012IW122b as the setting change end date and time ( Step 012IWS811). The second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the setting change command reception flag that has been set.

In this example, the initialization process should be executed when the setting change process is executed by executing the processes of steps 012IWS810 and S811, but only the log information regarding the setting change is recorded. However, by omitting the recording of the log information regarding the RAM clear, it is possible to prevent the log information from being unnecessarily recorded.

If the initialization command has not been received (N in step 012IWS807), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the restoration command has been received (step 012IWS812). If the command for restoration is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the setting confirmation command reception flag is set (step 012IWS813). If the setting confirmation command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting confirmation process is not executed and only the restoration process is executed), the process is ended as it is.

On the other hand, when the setting confirmation command reception flag is not set (Y in step 012IWS813), that is, when both the setting confirmation process and the restoration process are executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b stores the setting value storage area in the RAM012IW122b. The current setting value stored in is read (step 012IWS814). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and stores the log information in the log area of the RAM 012IW122b in association with the read setting value and using the input date and time information as the setting confirmation end date and time ( Step 012IWS815). The second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the setting confirmation command reception flag that has been set.

In this example, when the setting confirmation process is not executed and only the restoration process is executed, the log information is not recorded, but the log information may be recorded. In this case, for example, when it is N in step 012IWS813, the date and time information may be input from the real time clock 012IW126, and the input date and time information may be used as the recovery date and time to store the log information in the log area of the RAM 012IW122b.

(Current time setting process)
32-34 is a flowchart showing the current time setting process (step 012IWS213). In the current time setting process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first confirms whether or not the maintenance mode flag is set (step 012IWS821). If the maintenance mode flag is set (that is, in the maintenance mode), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets whether or not the current time setting flag indicating that the current time is being set is set. It is confirmed (step 012IWS822).

If the current time setting flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the player has performed the current time setting selection operation (step 012IWS823). For example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the current time setting selection operation is detected based on the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B. If it is detected that the current time setting selection operation has been performed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to start displaying the current time setting screen on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS824). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the present time setting flag (step 012IWS825).

If the current time setting flag is set (Y in step 012IWS822), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is set to the standby flag indicating that it is on standby until the current time setting log information is recorded. It is confirmed whether or not (step 012IWS826). If the standby flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the hour signal has been received from the first effect control CPU 012IW120a (step 012IWS827).

In this example, as described above, the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B are first input to the first effect control CPU 012IW120a, so that the player operates the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. When the setting information of the current time is input, a signal that can specify the input setting information of the current time is sequentially transmitted from the first effect control CPU 012IW120a to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b. In this case, in this example, the hour signal indicating the set input time, the minute signal indicating the minute, the second signal indicating the second, the year signal indicating the year, the month signal indicating the month, the day signal indicating the day, and the day of the week are set. The signals are transmitted in the order of the indicated day signals. In this example, as already described, the first effect control CPU 012IW120a generates a timer interrupt every 10 ms and transmits these signals every 10 ms.

If the hour signal is received (Y in step 012IWS827), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the time information of the real-time clock 012IW126 at the time indicated by the received hour signal (step 012IWS828). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to 500 ms to a waiting timer for measuring a waiting period until recording the log information of the current time setting (step 012IWS829). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the standby flag (step 012IWS830).

If the standby flag is set (Y in step 012IWS826), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the standby timer has timed out (step 012IWS831). If the standby timer has not timed out, has the second effect control CPU 012IW120b received any one of a minute signal, a second signal, an year signal, a month signal, a day signal, and a day of the week signal from the first effect control CPU 012IW120a. It is confirmed whether or not (step 012IWS832).

If any of the signals is received (Y in step 012IWS832), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the information of the real-time clock 012IW126 to the information indicated by the received signal (step 012IWS833). For example, when the minute signal is received, the minute information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set to the minute indicated by the received minute signal. Further, for example, when the second signal is received, the second information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set to the second indicated by the received second signal. Further, for example, when the year signal is received, the year information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set to the year indicated by the received year signal. Further, for example, when the month signal is received, the month information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set to the month indicated by the received month signal. Further, for example, when the date signal is received, the date information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set to the date indicated by the received date signal. Further, for example, when a day of the week signal is received, the day of the week information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set to the day of the week indicated by the received day of the week signal.

If the waiting timer has timed out (Y in step 012IWS831), that is, if 500 ms has elapsed since the first time signal was received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b outputs the hour, minute, and time from the real-time clock 012IW126. The date and time information of the second, year, month, day, and day of the week is read (step 012IWS834). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b stores the log information in the log area of the RAM 012IW122b using these read date and time information as the time setting date and time (step 012IWS835). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the current time setting flag and the standby flag (step 012IWS836).

32-35 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the setting timing of the current time. When the player operates the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B to set the current time, the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B are first input to the first effect control CPU 012IW120a. Then, as shown in FIGS. 32-35, according to the setting operation by the player, the hour signal, the minute signal, the second signal, the year signal, the month signal, the day signal, and the day signal are for the first effect control every 10 ms. It is sequentially transmitted from the CPU 012IW120a to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b.

Upon receiving these signals, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b immediately sets the information of the real-time clock 012IW126 based on the received signals, as shown in FIGS. 32-35. As shown in FIGS. 32-35, when the hour signal is received, the hour information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received hour signal. When the minute signal is received 10 ms later, the minute information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received minute signal. When the second signal is received 10 ms later, the second information of the real time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received second signal. When the year signal is received 10 ms after that, the year information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received year signal. When a month signal is received 10 ms after that, the month information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received month signal. When the date signal is received 10 ms after that, the date information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received date signal. Further, when the day of the week signal is received 10 ms after that, the day of the week information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received day of the week signal.

On the other hand, the log information of the time setting date and time is not immediately recorded, but the waiting timer is set when the first time signal is received, the waiting timer times out, and as shown in FIG. After waiting for 500 ms after receiving the signal, the date and time information from the real time clock 012IW126 is read and recorded in the log information as the time set date and time.

If the player further operates the current time setting before 500 ms has elapsed after receiving the hour signal, another hour signal, minute signal, or second signal before 500 ms elapses. The information of the real-time clock 012IW126 may be set by receiving the year signal, the month signal, the day signal, and the day of the week signal, but in this example, the information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set whenever the signals are received. Therefore, the log information of the time set date and time is recorded based on the date and time information of the real time clock 012IW126 set based on the last received signal.

If the log information is recorded each time an hour signal, minute signal, second signal, year signal, month signal, day signal, or day of the week signal transmitted individually is received, the log information of the current time setting becomes redundant more than necessary. However, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 32-35, the log information of the time setting date and time is recorded after waiting until all the signals related to the time setting are received. It prevents it from becoming redundant.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, the case where the first effect control CPU 012IW120a to which the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B are primarily input is provided is shown. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, an input circuit to which a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B is input is provided, and an hour signal, a minute signal, a second signal, a year signal, a month signal, a day signal, and a day signal are sequentially output from the input circuit. It may be configured to be transmitted to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b. It may be configured in such a manner that the signal according to the operation is transmitted to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b in some form in sequence.

In addition, in this example, the case where the real-time clock 012IW126 is mounted on the side of the second effect control board 012IW12b is shown. However, the real-time clock is mounted on the side of the first effect control board 012IW12a, and the operation of the player is possible. Accordingly, the first effect control CPU 012IW120a side may be configured to update the date and time information of the real-time clock at any time. Then, the first effect control CPU 012IW120a transmits the updated real-time clock date and time information to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, and the second effect control CPU 012IW120b updates the counter and the like based on the received date and time information. May be configured to be managed.

(Recording date and time of power interruption)
32-36 is a flowchart showing the power interruption date and time recording processing (step 012IWS214). In the power interruption date and time recording process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first confirms whether or not a temporary storage enable flag indicating that temporary storage of the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126 is set (step 012IWS841). ). If the temporary storage enable flag is set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the temporary storage timer for measuring the time for temporarily storing the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126 has timed out ( Step 012IWS842). If the temporary storage timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b reads the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and stores the read date and time information in the temporary area provided in the RAM 012IW122b (step 012IWS843). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to 100 ms in the temporary storage timer (step 012IWS844).

The date and time information is stored in the temporary area of the RAM012IW122b every 100 ms. However, if the previous date and time information is stored in the temporary area, new date and time information is temporarily overwritten every 100 ms. It shall be stored in the area.

If the temporary storable flag is not set (N in step 012IWS841), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the initialization designation command or the restoration command is received (step 012IWS845). If the initialization designation command or the command for restoration is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the log information of the previous power-on date and time is stored in the log area of the RAM 012IW122b (step 012IWS846). ). If the log information of the last power-on date and time is not stored (N in step 012IWS846), the process proceeds to step 012IWS849. If the log information of the last power-on date and time is stored (Y in step 012IWS846), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b reads the date and time information stored in the temporary area of the RAM 012IW122b, and the read date and time information is cut off. The log information is stored in the log area of the RAM 012IW122b as the date and time (step 012IWS847). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS849.

If neither the initialization designation command nor the restoration command has been received (N in step 012IWS845), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b causes the other commands (however, power-on such as the setting confirmation command and the setting change command to be turned on). It is confirmed whether or not a command (which is sometimes transmitted) is received (step 012IWS848). If another command is received, for example, if a variation pattern command or a display result designation command is received, the process proceeds to step 012IWS849.

In Step 012IWS849, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the temporary storage enable flag (Step 012IWS849). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to 100 ms in the temporary storage timer (step 012IWS844).

Note that the temporary storable flag, when set in step 012IWS849, is maintained until the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, or the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b occurs. Then, when the effect control main processing shown in FIG. 32-16 is started due to the power-on of the gaming machine, the system reset, or the like, it is reset by the initialization processing of step 012IWS201.

32-37 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the recording timing of the log information of the power interruption date and time. As shown in FIGS. 32-37, when the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is in the process of being activated, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is determined to be Y in step 012IWS841 of the power interruption date and time recording process, and steps 012IWS842 to S844. By executing the processing of (1), the date and time information is temporarily stored in the temporary area of the RAM 012IW 122b every 100 ms.

Next, when the power supply to the game machine is stopped or a system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b occurs, the initialization process (see step 012IWS201) is executed, and the temporary storage enable flag is reset, the second effect control Even when the CPU 012IW120b for use returns to the activated state, it is determined to be N in step 012IWS841 of the power interruption date/time recording process, the temporary storage of the date/time information for every 100 ms is not executed, and it is finally stored in the temporary area of the RAM012IW122b. Date and time information is maintained.

If the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and then the power supply to the gaming machine is started, at least the initialization designation command or the command at the time of restoration should be received. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 32-37 (1), the date and time information maintained in the temporary area is read out on the condition that the initialization designation command or the command at the time of restoration is received, and the read out date and time. The log information is stored in the log area with the information as the power cut date and time (Y in step 012IWS845, see step 012IWS847). Then, after that, the temporary storage enable flag is set, and the temporary storage of the date and time information for every 100 ms is restarted (see steps 012IWS849 and S850). However, in this example, the log information of the power-on date and time is also recorded (see step 012IWS203), but when the log information of the power-on date and time before the occurrence of the power failure is not recorded, Since there is a possibility that some abnormality has occurred, in this case, the log information of the power interruption date and time is configured not to be recorded (see N in step 012IWS846).

On the other hand, if a system reset or the like of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b occurs, it does not mean that the power supply to the gaming machine itself has stopped, but an initialization designation command or a command for restoration from the gaming control microcomputer 100. The power-on command is not sent. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 32-37 (2), when the initialization designation command and the command at the time of restoration are not received, it is determined that the power failure of the gaming machine itself has not occurred. The log information is controlled so that the date and time information maintained in the temporary area is the power cut date and time. In this case, as shown in FIG. 32-37 (2), based on the reception of other commands (excluding the commands transmitted at power-on such as the setting confirmation command and the setting change command), for example, On the basis of the reception of the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, etc., the temporary storage enable flag is set, and the temporary storage of the date and time information at every 100 ms is restarted (see steps 012IWS849 and S850).

If the log information of the power interruption date and time is recorded only based on the detection of the stop on the second effect control CPU 012IW120b side, when the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b occurs ( 2 When the power supply of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is temporarily stopped by the system reset of the CPU 012IW120b for effect control and the like), the log information of the power interruption date and time is recorded, and the game is played. Although the power failure of the machine itself does not occur, log information of the power failure date may be recorded. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 32-37, the date and time when the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is stopped are temporarily stored as a temporary power cut date and time, and an initialization designation command, a restoration command, etc. The log information of the power cut date and time is configured to be officially recorded on condition that the power-on command is received, so that such a situation does not occur.

In this example, it is assumed that the power failure of the gaming machine itself is recorded and the power failure date and time is recorded in the log information on condition that the initialization designation command or the command at the time of restoration is received. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the power cutoff date and time may be recorded in the log information based on the reception of other commands such as a setting confirmation command and a setting change command transmitted at power-on.

In addition, in this example, when the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b occurs instead of the power failure of the gaming machine itself, the case where the log information is not recorded is shown. I can't. For example, in addition to the area for recording the log information for the game store, an area for recording the log information for the game machine maker is provided, and the date and time of occurrence of the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is recorded in the log information. Alternatively, it may be configured to record in an area for a game machine maker. With such a configuration, the log information can be used as information for development by the game machine maker.

Next, a specific example of the display screen in the maintenance mode will be described. 32-40 to 32-43 are explanatory views for explaining a specific example of the display screen in the maintenance mode. Note that in FIGS. 32-40 to 32-43, the display screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), (C),....

First, a specific example of a display screen when a maintenance history selection operation is performed in the maintenance mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 32-40 and 32-41. When the setting confirmation command is received when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, a character display such as "setting confirmation" is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in Fig. 32-40(A). The setting confirmation display is started (see steps 012IWS453 to S455). Also, as shown in FIG. 32-40(A), when the setting confirmation display is being displayed, a character display such as "Press the push button to switch to the maintenance mode" is displayed on the image display device 5. Then, a display prompting an operation for shifting to the maintenance mode is displayed.

Next, when the player presses the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 32-40(B), the maintenance mode menu screen is displayed on the image display device 5, and the maintenance mode is entered (see steps 012IWS456 to S458). As shown in FIG. 32-40(B), on the maintenance mode menu screen, choices of “maintenance history”, “setting change/confirmation history”, and “current time setting” are displayed, and the current time is displayed. It is displayed.

When the option 012IW106 of "maintenance history" is selected, the display is switched to the maintenance history screen on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 32-40(C), on the maintenance history screen, the date and time and the log contents are displayed in association with each other, and the latest log information is displayed in order so as to be ranked higher. In the example shown in FIG. 32-40(C), an illegal prize error indicating that an illegal prize has been detected in the prize hole such as the first prize hole and the second prize hole, the first count switch 012IW023a and the second count Log information of a switch abnormality error indicating that an abnormality of various switches such as the switch 012IW023b, a prize ball error indicating that a prize ball abnormality is detected, and a magnet error indicating that an abnormal magnetism is detected is displayed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 32-40(C), log information indicating that the probability variation failure is detected is also displayed (see steps 012IWS958 to S960).

Further, when the maintenance history screen has a plurality of pages, when the next page is selected, as shown in FIG. 32-40(D), the screen shifts to the second page of the maintenance history screen. In the example shown in FIG. 32-40(D), log information of setting change start and setting change end (see steps 012 IWS802 and S811) and log information of power interruption date and power-on date and time are displayed (step 012IWS203, S847). Further, in the example shown in FIG. 32-40(D), log information for left-handed notification and full tank notification is also displayed (see steps 012IWS117 and S145).

If there is a next page, the next page selection operation moves to the third page of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. When the selection operation is performed, the screen shifts to the fourth page of the maintenance history screen as shown in Fig. 32-41(F). In the example shown in FIG. 32-41(E), log information indicating the start of setting confirmation and the end of setting confirmation is displayed (see steps 012IWS805 and S815), and the current time is set during the maintenance mode during setting confirmation. The log information to that effect is also displayed (see step 012IWS835).

In the present example, when the current time is set, the date and time information after the setting is read and the log information is recorded, so that there may be a case where the date and time do not match before and after the current time is set. For example, in the example illustrated in FIG. 32-41(E), the setting confirmation is started at 09:36:28 on 2018/03/21 (Wednesday), while the setting time is set. It is supposed to be 09:36:16 on 2018/03/21 (Wednesday), and the time is earlier than the start of setting confirmation. As described above, in this example, even when the date and time do not match before and after the current time setting, the log information is recorded in the log area in the order in which the log information occurs, and as shown in FIG. The log information is displayed in the order of occurrence of the log information.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 32-41(F), log information of an RWM abnormality error (see steps 012IWS017 to S020) indicating that some kind of RAM abnormality has occurred when the power of the gaming machine is turned on is displayed. Then, since the RWM abnormal error has occurred, the gaming shop staff temporarily turns off the power supply to the gaming machine and then turns on the power again while turning on the clear switch, as shown in FIG. 32-41(E). Log information indicating that the encryption processing has been executed is also displayed (see step IWS809).

Next, a specific example of the display screen when the setting change/confirmation history selection operation is performed in the maintenance mode will be described with reference to FIGS. While the setting confirmation display shown in FIG. 32-42(A) is being displayed, the player presses the push button 31B to display the maintenance mode menu screen shown in FIG. 32-42(B). It is assumed that the option 012IW107 of "setting change/confirmation history" is selected and operated during display.

When the option 012IW107 of “setting change/confirmation history” is selected, the display is switched to the setting change/confirmation history screen on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 32-42(C), on the setting change/confirmation history screen, the date and time, the setting change or the setting confirmation, and the changed setting value or the confirmed setting value are displayed in association with each other. Then, the latest log information is displayed in order so that it is ranked higher.

Next, a specific example of the display screen when the selection operation of the current time setting is performed in the maintenance mode will be described with reference to FIGS. While the setting confirmation display shown in FIG. 32-43(A) is being displayed, the player presses the push button 31B to display the maintenance mode menu screen shown in FIG. 32-43(B). It is assumed that the “current time setting” option 012IW108 is selected and operated during display.

When the “current time setting” option 012IW108 is selected, the display is switched to the current time setting screen on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 32-43 (C) and FIG. 32-43 (D), the year, month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, or second item is selected by the left and right tilt operation of the stick controller 31A, and the stick A number for each item is selected by tilting the controller 31A forward and backward. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 32-43(C), when it is desired to change the hour from 16 to 15, the stick controller 31A is tilted four times to the right to move to the hour item, and the stick controller 31A is moved. The tilt operation may be performed once in the front direction (toward the player) to change from “16” to “15”. Then, as shown in FIG. 32-43 (D), when the player presses the push button 31B, the current date and time is set to the currently displayed date and time.

In the feature part 012IW, the character effect and the light guide plate effect are executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit. For example, when an error occurs, an error displayed on the image display device 9 is displayed. The display is also executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect during the big hit. That is, the error display is displayed prior to the big hit suggestive effect (or pre-game suggestive effect or in-game suggestive effect). With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the occurrence of an error. In the case where a predetermined effect that can be executed simultaneously with the big hit medium suggestion effect (for example, a particular effect mode of the fanfare effect) is provided, and the predetermined effect is a mode that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit medium suggestion effect In addition, the suggestion effect during the big hit may be prioritized. Specifically, in the case where the image displayed on the image display device 5 by the predetermined effect makes it difficult to recognize the image displayed by the big hit medium suggestion effect, the image is displayed by the big hit medium suggestion effect. The images may be preferentially displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize the suggestive effect during the big hit.

Further, in the present characteristic part 012IW, the decorative design is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, but the decorative design is variably displayed by driving the drum-shaped movable body having the decorative design on the surface. (In other words, it may be applied to a so-called drum type game machine). Alternatively, the decorative pattern may be variably displayed by driving a belt-shaped movable body having a decorative pattern on the surface (that is, it may be applied to a so-called belt reel type game machine). In such a drum-type or belt-reel type gaming machine, the drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body performs a characteristic operation different from the normal operation at the start of the first fluctuation after the setting change (or the characteristic). Behavior may occur). Therefore, in the first variation after the setting is changed, the light guide plate effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable body at the start of the variation may be executed (or the execution rate may be increased). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the setting has been changed.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 012IW, the character effect and the light guide plate effect are configured to reduce the visibility of the suggestion effect during the big hit, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, For example, the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect may be reduced by executing the accessory effect or the light guide plate effect. Also in this case, the visibility may be lowered at a high rate when the player gives an undesired suggestion. For example, when an even-numbered initial result is displayed, when the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, or when the in-game suggestive effect of the first effect mode is executed, the visibility is reduced. As described above, the ratio of performing the accessory effect in which the movable member operates and the light guide plate effect in which characters and pictures are displayed by the light guide plate may be increased. In addition, not only the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect, but also effects including a control for outputting a predetermined sound, a control for vibrating the movable member and the stick controller 31A, and a control for causing a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED to emit light in a predetermined mode. By performing the above, the player's attention may be directed to another person, and the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect may be reduced (or made less noticeable).

In addition to the setting suggestion effect of the main feature section 012IW, a simultaneous effect executed based on the measurement result (measurement timer set at power-on and the measurement result using the real-time clock 012IW126) is executed in a specific mode. Therefore, the setting may be suggested.

In addition, a setting suggesting effect that suggests a setting according to the number of times the variable display is continuously executed without the reserved memory becoming 0, or the number of starting winnings exceeding the upper limit reserved memory occurs (for example, a predetermined image). Display control, output control of a predetermined sound, light emission control of a predetermined lamp, etc.) may be performed.

In addition, a setting suggesting effect that suggests a setting based on the detection of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B during a predetermined operation valid period (for example, display control of a predetermined image or output control of a predetermined sound, predetermined control). (Emission control of the lamp is performed) may be performed.

The characteristic part 012IW has been described above with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention is not limited to modifications and additions without departing from the scope of the present invention. included.

(Modification 1)
For example, the characteristic part 012IW exemplifies a form in which the security cover 012IW500A is fixed to the outer frame 012IW001a, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 012IW003 side. Good. Specifically, as a modification 1, as shown in FIGS. 32-44(A) and 32-44(B), a security cover 012IW500B including a short piece 012IW500Ba and a long piece 012IW500Bb is provided, for example, with respect to the substrate case 012IW201. The right end of the long piece 012IW500Bb is provided so as to be slidable in the left-right direction between a covering position for covering the right side of the substrate case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051 and a covering releasing position on the right side of the covering position.

On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the security cover 012IW500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 012IW201, and is set via the through hole 012IW500Bc formed on the left side of the long piece 012IW500Bb. The key 012IW051 may be operable. That is, in the first modification, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the security cover 012IW500B (long piece 012IW500Bb) covers the setting key 012IW051 and slides in the left-right direction with respect to the board case 012IW201. By being regulated, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the regulated state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the security cover 012IW500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 012IW201 to release the state in which the setting key 012IW051 is covered, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is released. The restricted state can be released (can be changed to the permitted state).

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 32-44(A) and 32-44(B), when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the projecting dimension of the security cover 012IW500B from the board case 012IW201 is the length L1. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened, by sliding the security cover 012IW500B with respect to the board case 012IW201, the protruding dimension of the security cover 012IW500B from the board case 012IW201 is extended to the length L2. (L2>L1).

That is, as shown in FIG. 32-45(A), when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is rotated about a predetermined rotation axis and opened, the security cover 012IW500B has a protruding dimension from the substrate case 012IW201. By sliding the board case 012IW201 until it reaches the length L2 (putting the pachinko gaming machine 1 in an allowable state), a clerk or the like in the game hall operates the setting key 012IW051 to set the value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permissible state, as shown in FIG. 32-45(B), the security cover 012IW500B is mounted on the board case 012IW201 until the protruding dimension from the board case 012IW201 becomes the length L1. If it is not slidably moved (without changing the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the regulated state), the security cover 012IW500B comes into contact with the front end of the outer frame 012IW001a, and it becomes impossible to close the gaming machine frame 012IW003. Is becoming

For this reason, in this modification 1, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 012IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowed state, so that the setting key 012IW051 is covered by the security cover 012IW500B. Forgetting to do so, that is, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 012IW003 from being closed without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and the security can be improved.

In the state where the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 012IW500Ba is arranged between the outer frame 012IW001a and the gaming machine frame 012IW003, so that the movement from the covering position to the left and right is restricted. However, the security cover 012IW500B may be moved in the left-right direction within a range in which the setting key 012IW051 is kept covered by the security cover 012IW500B.

(Modification 2)
Furthermore, as a mode in which the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 012IW003 side, as shown in FIGS. 32-46(A) and 32-46(B) as a modified example 2, the left end portion of the security cover 012IW500C is a gaming machine. Between a covering position for covering the right side portion of the substrate case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051 and a covering releasing position rotated from the covering position, centering on a vertical axis 012IW500Cd provided on the back side of the frame 012IW003. It may be pivotally supported by. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 012IW500Ca is locked to the locking portion 012IW500Cc provided on the right side of the outer frame 012IW001a, and the long piece 012IW500Cb pushes the setting key 012IW051 to the rear side. The rotation from the state of being covered to the back side may be restricted.

When the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the security cover 012IW500C is rotated around the axis 012IW500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the board case 012IW201 to release the state in which the setting key 012IW051 is covered. It should be possible to operate it. That is, in the second modification, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the security cover 012IW500C (long piece 012IW500Cb) is restricted from rotating with the setting key 012IW051 being covered, so that the pachinko gaming machine is prevented. 1 is maintained in the regulated state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the security cover 012IW500C is rotated around the axis 012IW500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the board case 012IW201 to release the state in which the setting key 012IW051 is covered. By doing so, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be brought into a state in which it can be released (can be changed to an allowable state) from the restricted state.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 32-47(A), the security cover 012IW500C in the present modification 2 rotates around the pivot 012IW500Cd (puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 in an allowed state), thereby By operating the setting key 012IW051 by a store clerk or the like, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permissible state, as shown in FIG. 32-47(B), the security cover 012IW500C is rotated clockwise in a plan view and the security cover 012IW500C sets a key. If the 012IW051 is not covered (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed to the regulated state), the security cover 012IW500C comes into contact with the front end portion of the outer frame 012IW001a, and it is impossible to close the gaming machine frame 012IW003. Is becoming

For this reason, in this modification 2, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 012IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowed state, so that the security key 012IW500C covers the setting key 012IW051. Forgetting to do so, that is, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 012IW003 from being closed without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and the security can be improved.

(Modification 3)
Further, in the characteristic part 012IW, the mode in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the gaming machine frame 012IW003 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass door frame. The setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changeable by opening 012IW003a. Incidentally, in the case where the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the glass door frame 012IW003a in this way, a modification 3 is shown in FIGS. 32-48(A) to 32-48(C). As described above, the through hole 012IW003b may be formed in the lower portion of the gaming machine frame 012IW003, and the setting key 012IW051 can be operated through the through hole 012IW003b. In this case, the mounting surface of the IC or the like on the main board 11 is arranged toward the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the setting key 012IW051 is arranged on the surface of the main board 11 opposite to the mounting surface. .

When the setting key 012IW051 can be operated via the through hole 012IW003b in this way, a door body 012IW003c capable of opening and closing the through hole 012IW003b is provided, and when the door body 012IW003c is closed, the setting key 012IW051 The operation may be restricted. As shown in FIGS. 32-48(B) and 32-48(C), when the door body 012IW003c is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 012IW003, the door body is closed by closing the glass door frame 012IW003a. Since 012IW003c will be sandwiched between the glass door frame 012IW003a and the game machine frame 012IW003 so that it can be opened and closed, it is possible to strongly prevent the setting key 012IW051 from being illegally operated when the glass door frame 012IW003a is closed. It is possible to improve security.

(Modification 4)
Further, the information that can be recorded as the log information is not limited to that shown by the characteristic part 012IW, and various log information can be recorded. 32-49 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the maintenance history screen in Modification 4. The fourth modification shows a case in which information indicating setting suggestion failure or “pointing failure” is recorded as log information and is configured to be displayed on the maintenance history screen. The log information 012IW109a of "unsuccessful setting suggestion" is the reason why the player does not operate or the operation means fails, even though the execution condition of the set value suggestive effect suggesting the current set value is satisfied. Thus, the log information indicates that the set value suggestion effect has not been executed or the set value suggestion effect having a low suggestion accuracy has been executed. In addition, the log information 012IW109b indicating “unsuccessful point addition” means that the player does not operate even though the condition for giving points necessary for customizing the display screen of the image display device 5 and acquiring image content is satisfied. It is log information indicating that points have not been given due to reasons such as failure of the operating means or the like. As described above, it may be configured such that the profit related to the performance or the profit related to the content can be given in some form and the log information thereof is recorded.

Further, for example, in a gaming machine provided with a distribution device for alternately allocating game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 5 pieces) is continuously provided to one of the starting winning openings. It is also possible to detect the winning opening unit abnormality error based on the detection of the winning prize), record it in the log information, and display it on the maintenance history screen. Further, for example, a vibration error indicating that an abnormal vibration in a gaming machine is detected, or a radio wave error indicating that an abnormal electric wave is detected may be recorded as log information and displayed on the maintenance history screen. Of course, various modes of log information can be considered.

As described above, according to the feature unit 012IW, any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, the setting value “1” to the setting value “3”) having different advantages for the player is set. It is possible. In addition, a storage area (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing information generated during a game is provided, abnormal history information (for example, log information) regarding a game can be specified and displayed, and storage contents of the storage area can be displayed. Initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 1) for initialization can be executed, and when the initialization processing is executed, setting change processing (for example, setting change processing) for changing the set value is executed. It is possible. Further, when the initialization process is executed and the setting change process is not executed, it is possible to display that the initialization process has been executed in a identifiable manner (for example, as shown in FIG. 32-41(E)). , The RAM clear log information is displayed), and when the initialization process and the setting change process are executed, the setting change process is executed without displaying a display that can specify that the initialization process has been executed. It is possible to display the information (for example, as shown in FIG. 32-40(D), only the log information indicating the end of the setting change is displayed). Therefore, since unnecessary information is not displayed, it is possible to prevent the history information from being difficult to confirm. That is, in this example, when the setting change process is executed, it is premised that the initialization process is executed, but when the log information of the setting change is displayed, the initialization process is executed. Since it is obvious that it is redundant to record and display the log information of the initialization process. Therefore, by not recording and displaying unnecessary log information of the initialization process, it is possible to prevent unnecessary log information from being recorded, and to prevent the history information from being difficult to confirm.

Further, according to the characteristic part 012IW, it is possible to execute the setting confirmation process (for example, the setting confirmation process) for confirming the set value, and the action of the player is detected during the execution of the setting confirmation process. Based on the fact that the push button 31B is pressed while the setting confirmation display is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 32-40 to 32-43, Maintenance mode menu screen is displayed). Therefore, it is possible to preferably confirm the history information.

In addition, according to the characteristic part 012IW, the game control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) that controls the game, and the effect control based on the information from the game control means. And a production control means (for example, a second production control CPU 012IW120b) for performing the above. In addition, the game control means can output initialization information (for example, an initialization designation command) indicating that the initialization processing has been executed, and at the same time, change setting information (for example, the setting change information indicating that the setting change processing is executed). , Setting change command) can be output. Further, the effect control means can display different history information so that different history information can be specified depending on whether or not the initialization information and the setting change information are output (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b uses the initialization designation command). And based on the fact that the setting change command is received, the log information of the setting change end is recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 32-40(D). Therefore, it is possible to preferably confirm the history information.

Further, according to the characteristic unit 012IW, a predetermined abnormality (for example, a left-handed notification state) can be detected, and a history storage unit (for example, a log area of the RAM 012IW122b) capable of storing history information is provided. In addition, a first abnormal state indicating that the predetermined abnormality has a predetermined importance level (for example, a first left-handed notification state) and a first abnormality state indicating that the predetermined abnormality has a higher importance level than the first abnormal state. Information indicating that a second abnormal state has been detected without being able to store information indicating that the first abnormal state has been detected as history information that can detect two abnormal states (for example, a second left-handing notification state). Can be stored as history information (for example, log information is recorded only when the second left-handed notification state occurs). Therefore, the history information can be preferably stored.

In addition, according to the characteristic unit 012IW, the first abnormality (for example, the first left-handing notification state) and the second abnormality having a higher degree of importance than the first abnormality (for example, the second left-handing notification state). It can be detected. In addition, a history storage unit (for example, a log area of the RAM012IW122b) capable of storing history information of an abnormality relating to a game is provided, and the history information stored in the history storage unit can be displayed in an identifiable manner (for example, FIGS. A maintenance history screen is displayed as shown in FIGS. Further, when the second abnormality is detected, the information indicating that the second abnormality has been detected is stored as history information, while the first abnormality is detected when the first abnormality is detected by the abnormality detecting means. The information indicating that it has been performed is not stored as history information (for example, log information is recorded only when the second left-handing notification state occurs, and log information is not recorded even when the first left-handing notification state occurs). Therefore, the history information can be preferably stored and displayed. That is, since the storage capacity of the log information is also limited, if the log is recorded as the first anomaly log information of low importance, the history of necessary anomalies may disappear early. Then, since only the second and higher levels of importance are recorded, it is possible to suitably store and display the history information.

Further, according to the characteristic part 012IW, the second abnormality is detected according to the detection result of the first abnormality per unit period (for example, based on the execution conditions of the two first left-handing notifications being satisfied). The condition for executing the second left-handed notification is satisfied). Therefore, the history information can be preferably stored and displayed.

In this example, the case where the execution condition of the second left-handed notification is satisfied according to the number of times the execution condition of the first left-handed notification is satisfied is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it is configured to execute the second left-handed notification by determining that the execution condition of the second left-handed notification has been established based on the execution condition of the first left-handed notification has continued for a predetermined period. Good.

Further, according to the characteristic unit 012IW, it is possible to inform that the first abnormality is detected and the second abnormality is detected (for example, the first left-handing notification and the second left-handing notification are executed. ). In this case, it is possible to notify that the first abnormality has been detected in a predetermined mode, and to notify that the second abnormality has been detected in a mode different from the predetermined mode (for example, in the first left-handed notification). Only the left hitting notification display is performed, and in the second left hitting notification, all lights of the game effect lamp 9 and sound output of the notification sound are performed in addition to the display of the left hitting notification display). Therefore, it is possible to preferably notify the abnormality.

In addition, according to the characteristic unit 012IW, it is possible to detect a plurality of types of first abnormality and second abnormality (for example, in addition to the first left-handing notification state and the second left-handing notification state, a first full tank notification). State and the second full tank notification state are detected). Further, the first abnormality and the second abnormality are detected under different detection conditions for each type of the first abnormality and the second abnormality (for example, the first left-handing notification state and the second left-handing notification state are transferred to the passage gate 012IW041). The determination is made by detecting the passage of the game ball 5 times or 10 times, whereas in the first full tank notification state and the second full tank notification state, the full state of the hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) is 10 Seconds or 30 seconds). Therefore, the history information can be preferably stored and displayed.

In this example, the case where the full tank notification is executed other than the left-handed notification is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it is configured to execute an abnormal winning notification, a magnet error notification, a ball clogging error notification, and the like. For these, there are a first notification with low importance and a second notification with high importance, and the second notification is given. The log information may be recorded only when it is executed and displayed on the maintenance history screen.

Further, according to the characteristic part 012IW, a predetermined control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) and a specific control means (for example, a control means for performing control based on information from the predetermined control means) (for example, The specific control means can temporarily store the date and time when the power supply to the specific control means is stopped (for example, the date and time information is stored in a temporary area of the RAM012IW122b every 100 ms). When the power supply to the specific control means is started, the information output by the predetermined control means that can specify that the power supply is started (for example, an initialization designation command, a command at the time of restoration) is provided. Based on the input, the temporarily stored date and time can be stored as the power cut date and time (for example, log information is stored in the log area as the power cut date and time). That is, it is possible to prevent a situation in which both the power failure of the gaming machine itself and the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b are recorded as the power failure date and time, and the power failure date and time are set. It can be stored appropriately.

Further, according to the characteristic unit 012IW, when the information that can specify that the power supply is started cannot be input when the power supply to the specific control unit is started, the temporarily stored date and time is set as the power cut date and time. Not stored (for example, if the initialization designation command or the restoration command is not received, the log information is not stored in the log area as the power cut date and time). Therefore, the power cut date and time can be preferably stored.

Further, according to the characteristic unit 012IW, the date and time can be temporarily stored at every predetermined timing (for example, 100 ms) (for example, the date and time information is stored in the temporary area of the RAM 012IW122b). Therefore, the power cut date and time can be preferably stored.

In this example, the case where the date and time information is temporarily stored every 100 ms is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, only when the stop of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is detected, the current date and time information may be temporarily stored and stored as a temporary power cut date and time.

Further, according to the characteristic unit 012IW, the temporary storage of the date and time for each predetermined timing is stopped based on the stop of the power supply to the specific control unit (for example, the temporary storage enable flag is reset, and the date and time for every 100 ms). Temporary storage of information will not be executed). Then, the temporary storage of the date and time at each predetermined timing is restarted based on the input of the predetermined information (for example, the initialization designation command, the command at the time of restoration, another command) output by the predetermined control means (for example, , The temporary storage enabled flag is set, and the temporary storage of date and time information every 100 ms is restarted). Therefore, the power cut date and time can be preferably stored.

Further, according to the characteristic part 012IW, the specific control means can store the date and time when the power supply to the specific control means is started (for example, the power-on date and time is recorded as log information). In addition, if the date and time when the power supply is started is not stored, the temporarily stored date and time is not stored as the power cut date (for example, if the log information of the power on date before the power cut is not recorded. Does not record the log information of the power cut date). Therefore, it is possible to prevent an abnormal storage state. That is, since there is no record that the power of the gaming machine has been turned on, it is possible to prevent an abnormal state in which the power cut date and time are recorded.

Further, according to the characteristic part 012IW, the first control means (for example, the first effect control CPU 012IW120a) and the second control means (for example, the second effect control for controlling based on the information from the first control means). CPU 012IW120b). In addition, the first control unit sequentially outputs a plurality of pieces of information regarding the change of the date and time to the second control unit over a predetermined period based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (e.g., 10 ms has elapsed) (for example, an hour signal and a minute signal). , Second signal, year signal, month signal, day signal, and day of the week signal). In addition, the second control unit stores the date and time change history after a specific period of time which is equal to or longer than a predetermined period after inputting a part of the plurality of pieces of information regarding the date and time change (for example, FIG. As shown in 35, after waiting for 500 ms after receiving the hour signal, it is recorded in the log information as the time setting date and time). Therefore, the date and time change history can be preferably stored.

Further, according to this feature unit 012IW, the second control unit changes the internal date and time information each time the information regarding the change in date and time is input (for example, as shown in FIGS. 32-35, the information is received. Immediately set the information of the real-time clock 012IW126 based on the hour signal, minute signal, second signal, year signal, month signal, day signal, or day signal). Therefore, the date and time change history can be preferably stored.

Further, according to the characteristic unit 012IW, when the information regarding the change of the date and time is input a plurality of times before the specific period elapses, the second control unit determines the date and time based on the information regarding the change of the date and time input last. The change history is stored (for example, when the hour signal, the minute signal, the second signal, the year signal, the month signal, the day signal, and the day signal are further received before the elapse of 500 ms, based on the last received signal. Log information of the time set date and time is recorded based on the set date and time information of the real-time clock 012IW126). Therefore, the date and time change history can be preferably stored.

Further, according to the feature section 012IW, the second control means can display the date and time change history (for example, as shown in FIG. 32-41(E), the current time is set on the maintenance history screen). Display the log information to the effect that). Further, according to the date and time after the change, the date and time change history is stored and displayed (for example, the date and time information is read from the set real time clock 012IW126 and the log information is recorded as the time set date and time). Therefore, the date and time change history can be preferably stored.

Further, according to the characteristic part 012IW, the second control means stores the history information according to the order in which the abnormality relating to the game occurs, regardless of the change of the date and time (for example, as shown in FIG. 32-41(E)). , Even if the date and time do not match before and after the current time setting, the log information is recorded in the log area in the order in which the log information occurs, and the log information is displayed in the order in which the log information occurs). Therefore, it is possible to preferably store the history information of the abnormality.

According to the characteristic part 012IW, it is possible to give a profit to the player based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball is won in the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b). (For example, after the jackpot game is over, it is controlled to a probable state). In addition, the specific condition can be established based on at least a predetermined condition being satisfied (for example, a probability variation big hit being achieved). Then, when the specific condition is not satisfied although the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to store specific information (for example, log information of the probability change non-establishment date and time) that can specify that the specific condition is not satisfied. .. Therefore, the information can be preferably stored. That is, a trouble other than an error can be recorded and information can be stored appropriately.

In addition, according to the characteristic part 012IW, it is possible to give a profit related to performance or a profit related to content (for example, as shown in FIG. 32-49, log information 012IW109a of “setting suggestion failure” or “point addition failure”. Of the log information 012IW109b). Therefore, the information can be preferably stored.

In this example, with respect to profit, when the V winning is not established and the probability change is not established, the setting suggestion is unsuccessful, or the point is unsuccessful, log information is recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen. However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, in a gaming machine configured to perform a bonus game in which a game ball shifts to a big hit game on the basis of a game ball winning in a specific area (V winning area) in a winning object, a gaming ball is winning in the V winning area. If not, the log information may be recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen. Further, for example, when the setting value suggesting effect is executed but a low setting value is suggested, the log information may be recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen. Further, for example, it may be configured to record the log information and display the log information on the maintenance history screen when it is not displayed or output in a scene in which an image having a low appearance frequency or a sound output is expected. In addition, for example, when applied to a slot machine, log information may be recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen if the pressing order is wrong while the pressing order navigation is being executed. As such, various modes can be considered as the “profit”.

Further, according to the characteristic part 012IW, it is possible to display the specific information in a recognizable manner (for example, as shown in FIG. 32-40(C), in the maintenance history screen, the ingredient information for which the probability change is unsuccessful is displayed or the like). As shown in FIGS. 32-49, the log information 012IW109a of “unsuccessful setting suggestion” and the log information 012IW109b of “unsuccessful point addition” are displayed on the maintenance history screen). Therefore, the information can be preferably displayed.

In this example, the case where the probability change failure date/time, the setting suggestion failure, and the point information failure log information is displayed on the maintenance history screen is shown, but it may be configured not to be displayed on the maintenance history screen. Then, the game machine maker may confirm what kind of trouble has occurred, and may utilize it for the development of the game machine.

Further, according to the characteristic part 012IW, information including the specific information can be output as a two-dimensional code (for example, a two-dimensional code including log information of the probability change failure date/time is generated and displayed). Therefore, the information can be preferably output.

In addition, in this example, the case where the log information is recorded in association with the date and time information including both the date and the time is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the log information may be recorded in association with date information including only the year, month and day, or the log information may be recorded in association with time information including only the hour, minute and second. Good. Various modes are conceivable as a method of recording the log information. Similarly, in the characteristic part 012IW, the “date and time” is not limited to the case where both the date information and the time information are included, and the case where only the date information is included, and only the time information is included. This is a concept that includes cases.

Further, the present characteristic part 012IW includes the following second invention. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. .. Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902 describes that the setting change process is executed when the power switch is operated to the ON side while the front frame is opened and the setting key switch is operated to the ON side. .. It is also described that the RAM area other than the setting value storage means is cleared in the setting change processing. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player is not always appropriate. Processing may not be possible. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the second invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine capable of being set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Operation means (for example, clear switch) provided so as to be able to execute initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 1 processing, RAM clear 2 processing) based on the operation when power supply to the gaming machine is started. When,
Specific information storage means (for example, RAM012IW122b) capable of storing specific information (for example, RAM clear flag) indicating that the operating means is operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started,
When performing a plurality of processes including a set value changing process for changing the set value, a process executing means that executes the process by using the specific information a plurality of times (for example, step 012IWS025 in the game control microcomputer 100). S034, S048 are executed) and a game machine characterized by the above. According to this feature, any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for a player is set. The processing can be suitably performed in the game machine configured to be settable. In particular, in the process of changing the set value, which takes a certain amount of processing time, by storing the specific information (in this example, the RAM clear flag), confirming the RAM clear flag, and executing the process, it is preferable It can be performed.

In this example, as a process to be executed “using specific information multiple times”, a setting confirmation command or a setting change command is transmitted in steps 012IWS026 and S207 depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set in step 012IWS025. Control, whether to execute the process of changing the setting value of steps 012IWS035 to S042 depending on whether the RAM clear flag is set in step 012IWS034, or clear the RAM in step 012IWS048. The case where the restoration process or the RAM clear 1 process of steps 012IWS049 and S051 is executed depending on whether the flag is set is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, whether or not the operation switch is enabled may be controlled immediately before the operation of changing the set value depending on whether or not the specific information (RAM clear flag) is set.

Further, as a game machine of means A of the second invention for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine capable of being set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Operation means (for example, clear switch) provided so as to be able to execute initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 1 processing, RAM clear 2 processing) based on the operation when power supply to the gaming machine is started. When,
Specific information storage means (for example, RAM012IW122b) capable of storing specific information (for example, RAM clear flag) indicating that the operating means is operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started,
When performing a plurality of processes including a set value changing process for changing the set value, a process executing means that executes the process by using the specific information a plurality of times (for example, step 012IWS025 in the game control microcomputer 100). (The part that executes S034 and S048),
Based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has been won in the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b), a profit giving means capable of giving a profit to the player (for example, for game control) The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is provided with a probability change state after the jackpot game is finished),
The specific condition can be satisfied based on at least a predetermined condition being satisfied (for example, a probability variation big hit),
When the specific condition is not satisfied even though the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to store specific information that can specify that the specific condition has not been satisfied (for example, log information of the probability change failure date/time). A game machine characterized by including specific information storage means (for example, a part that executes steps 012IWS958 to S960 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) is described. According to this feature, the degree of advantage to the player is described. In a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of different setting values, it is possible to preferably perform processing. In particular, in the process of changing the set value, which takes a certain amount of processing time, by storing the specific information (in this example, the RAM clear flag), confirming the RAM clear flag, and executing the process, it is preferable It can be performed. In addition, the information can be preferably stored.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the second invention,
The process execution means changes the set value in the set value change processing based on the operation of the operation means (for example, the part that executes steps 012IWS039 to S042 in the game control microcomputer 100).
According to such a configuration, the operating means can also be used, so that an increase in cost can be suppressed. That is, in this example, since the clear switch can be used both as the operation means for performing the operation for initializing the RAM 102 and the operation means for performing the operation for changing the set value, an increase in cost can be suppressed. it can.

In this example, since the clear switch is also used, it is necessary to check the state of the clear switch multiple times when turning on the power to the gaming machine, so the clear switch should be turned on first when turning on the power to the gaming machine. When it is detected, the RAM clear flag is set, and thereafter, whether or not the RAM clear flag is set is checked to see if the clear switch operation for initializing the RAM 102 is performed. As for the operation of the clear switch for the change operation, the state of the clear switch itself is confirmed so that the processing can be performed appropriately.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention,
Normal initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 1 processing) is executed based on the operation means being operated when power supply to the game machine is started, while power supply to the game machine is started. Sometimes, an initialization process executing unit performs an initialization process (for example, RAM clear 2 process) at the time of abnormality based on the detection of an abnormality (for example, a part that executes steps 012IWS015 and S051 in the game control microcomputer 100). )When,
A first storage area (for example, a clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102) in which the stored contents are cleared in the normal initialization process;
A second storage area (for example, a clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102) in which the stored contents are cleared in the initialization processing at the time of abnormality,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information in the second storage area (for example, the RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102).
According to such a configuration, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is suitable. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention,
Based on that the state of the operating means is switched from the off state to the on state, it is possible to determine that the operating means has been operated (for example, a portion for executing step 012IWS041 in the game control microcomputer 100),
The processing execution means can change the set value based on the judgment that the operation means has been operated by the judgment means in the setting value change processing (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, at step 012IWS041). If Y, execute step 012IWS042),
The determination means determines whether or not the operation means is operated by setting the state of the operation means at the first time when the power supply to the gaming machine is started to be on (for example, the game control microcomputer 100). Executes step 012IWS037 if N in step 012IWS036)
According to such a configuration, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is suitable. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 5 of the second invention,
It is provided with a timer interrupt processing execution means (for example, a portion executing steps S21 to S27 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing a timer interrupt processing each time a predetermined timer interrupt occurs.
The processing execution means executes the processing by using the specific information a plurality of times until the timer interrupt processing is executed after the power supply to the gaming machine is started (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is Execute steps 012IWS025, S034, S048)
According to such a configuration, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is suitable. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention,
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, a setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion for executing steps 012IWS047 and S178 in the game control microcomputer 100) Prepare,
Suggestion production execution means,
Based on the setting value information input from the information output means, a suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, big hit suggestive effect) can be executed (for example, second effect control CPU 012IW120b). Step 012 IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, S901 to S906),
The suggestive effect execution means,
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect in the third effect mode, a suggestive effect during game, and a big hit suggestive effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) It is possible to execute pre suggestion production, suggestion production during game, suggestion production during big hit),
When the setting value information is not normally input, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect is executable as the suggestive effect (for example, CPU 012IW120b for second effect control). Executes steps 012IWS514, S709, and S906, and thus does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect or the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, or the big hit medium suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode)
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player, It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to 6 of the second invention that can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the second invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the second invention described above.

Further, the characteristic part 012IW includes the following third invention. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-60546. .. Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-60546 describes that if the RAM clear switch is operated and the setting key switch is in the ON state, the initial setting 2 is executed and the lottery probability is changed. Further, it is described that the setting key switch is used to enable the setting switch, and the winning lottery probability of the special figure corresponding to the settings 1 to 3 indicated by the setting switch is set. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-60546, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player is not always appropriate. Processing may not be possible. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine capable of being set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Operating means (for example, a clear switch),
Process execution means capable of executing set value changing processing for changing the set value based on the operation means being operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started (for example, a game control microcomputer Portion for executing steps 012 IWS039 to S042 in 100),
Based on that the state of the operating means is switched from the off state to the on state, it is possible to determine that the operating means has been operated (for example, a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 012IWS041). Prepare,
The processing execution means can change the set value based on the judgment that the operation means has been operated by the judgment means in the setting value change processing (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can execute the step If Y in 012IWS041, execute step 012IWS042),
The determining means determines whether or not the operating means is operated by setting the state of the operating means for the first time when the setting value changing process is started to the ON state (for example, the game controlling microcomputer 100 is , If N in step 012IWS036, execute step 012IWS037)
According to this feature, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player is preferably processed. It can be performed. That is, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being changed unintentionally, even if the operation unit (in this example, the clear switch) is continuously pressed, and the processing is preferably performed. It can be carried out.

Further, as a game machine of means A of the third invention for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP-A-2017-60546,
A gaming machine capable of being set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Operating means (for example, a clear switch),
Process execution means capable of executing set value changing processing for changing the set value based on the operation means being operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started (for example, a game control microcomputer Portion for executing steps 012 IWS039 to S042 in 100),
Based on that the state of the operating means is switched from the off state to the on state, it is possible to determine that the operating means has been operated (for example, a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 012IWS041). Prepare,
The processing execution means can change the set value based on the judgment that the operation means has been operated by the judgment means in the setting value change processing (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can execute the step If Y in 012IWS041, execute step 012IWS042),
The determination means determines whether or not the operation means is operated by setting the first state of the operation means when the setting value change processing is started to the ON state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is , When Step 012IWS036 is N, Step 012IWS037 is executed),
further,
Based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has been won in the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b), a profit giving means capable of giving a profit to the player (for example, for game control) The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) includes a jackpot game, which is controlled to a probable state after the end of the game.
The specific condition can be satisfied based on at least a predetermined condition being satisfied (for example, a probability variation big hit),
When the specific condition is not satisfied even though the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to store specific information that can specify that the specific condition has not been satisfied (for example, log information of the probability change failure date/time). A game machine characterized by including specific information storage means (for example, a part that executes steps 012IWS958 to S960 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) is described. According to this feature, the degree of advantage to the player is described. In a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of different setting values, it is possible to preferably perform processing. That is, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being changed unintentionally, even if the operation unit (in this example, the clear switch) is continuously pressed, and the processing is preferably performed. It can be carried out. In addition, the information can be preferably stored.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the third invention,
A specific information storage unit (for example, RAM012IW122b) capable of storing specific information (for example, RAM clear flag) indicating that the operating unit has been operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started,
When executing a plurality of processes including the setting value changing process, the process executing means executes the process by using the specific information a plurality of times (eg, executes steps 012IWS025, S034, S048 in the game control microcomputer 100). Part)
According to such a configuration, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is suitable. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the third invention,
Normal initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 1 processing) is executed based on the operation means being operated when power supply to the game machine is started, while power supply to the game machine is started. Sometimes, an initialization process executing unit performs an initialization process (for example, RAM clear 2 process) at the time of abnormality based on the detection of an abnormality (for example, a part that executes steps 012IWS015 and S051 in the game control microcomputer 100). )When,
A first storage area (for example, a clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102) in which the stored contents are cleared in the normal initialization process;
A second storage area (for example, a clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102) in which the stored contents are cleared in the initialization processing at the time of abnormality,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information in the second storage area (for example, the RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102).
According to such a configuration, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is suitable. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the third invention,
First state storage means (for example, a previous clear switch buffer) for storing the state of the previous operation means,
A second state storage means (for example, a clear switch buffer) for storing the current state of the operation means,
The determining means can determine that the operating means has been operated based on that the stored content of the first state storage means is in the off state and the stored content of the second state storage means is in the on state ( For example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 012IWS041),
The first state storage means stores the ON state as the state of the operation means for the first time when the setting value changing process is started (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 012IWS037).
According to such a configuration, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is suitable. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the third invention,
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, a setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion for executing steps 012IWS047 and S178 in the game control microcomputer 100) Prepare,
Suggestion production execution means,
Based on the setting value information input from the information output means, a suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, big hit suggestive effect) can be executed (for example, second effect control CPU 012IW120b). Step 012 IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, S901 to S906),
The suggestive effect execution means,
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect in the third effect mode, a suggestive effect during game, and a big hit suggestive effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) It is possible to execute pre suggestion production, suggestion production during game, suggestion production during big hit),
When the setting value information is not normally input, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect is executable as the suggestive effect (for example, CPU 012IW120b for second effect control). Executes steps 012IWS514, S709, and S906, and thus does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect or the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, or the big hit medium suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode)
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player, It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 5 of the third invention that can be applied to the gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the third invention described above.

Further, the present characteristic part 012IW includes the following fourth invention. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and to be able to execute control in an advantageous state based on the set value being set. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, a variation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the production control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the variation stop command. It is described that, based on the value, display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that wrong suggestive performance may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) (for example, step in game control microcomputer 100) 012IWS042 execution part),
A game control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set,
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 012IWS047 and S178) ,
Based on the setting value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (eg, second effect) capable of executing suggestive effects (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, and big hit suggestive effect) (A part that executes steps 012IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, S901 to S906) in the control CPU 012IW120b),
If the setting value information output from the information output means is not normal, the suggestion effect executing means is set to a predetermined setting value that is less advantageous to the player among the setting values of the plurality of stages. As a matter of course, the suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the steps 012IWS512, S707, S904).
According to this feature, according to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the fourth invention for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) (for example, step in game control microcomputer 100) 012IWS042 execution part),
A game control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set,
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 012IWS047 and S178) ,
Based on the setting value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (eg, second effect) capable of executing suggestive effects (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, and big hit suggestive effect) (A part that executes steps 012IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, S901 to S906) in the control CPU 012IW120b),
If the setting value information output from the information output means is not normal, the suggestion effect executing means is set to a predetermined setting value that is less advantageous to the player among the setting values of the plurality of stages. As a matter of course, the suggestive effect can be executed (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes steps 012IWS512, S707, and S904),
further,
Based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has been won in the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b), a profit giving means capable of giving a profit to the player (for example, for game control) The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) includes a jackpot game, which is controlled to a probable state after the end of the game.
The specific condition can be satisfied based on at least a predetermined condition being satisfied (for example, a probability variation big hit),
When the specific condition is not satisfied even though the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to store specific information that can specify that the specific condition has not been satisfied (for example, log information of the probability change failure date/time). A gaming machine characterized by including a specific information storage means (for example, a portion that executes steps 012IWS958 to S960 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) is described. According to this characteristic, the setting is set. In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, the information can be preferably stored.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes the steps 012IWS047 and S178 to transmit the set value command at the time of turning on the power and at the start of the fluctuation). Do)
According to such a configuration, even if the setting value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the setting value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, as the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect with a high degree of specification of the set value being set (for example, pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, in-game suggestive effect, and big hit in the fourth effect mode). It is possible to execute a suggestion effect) and a second suggestion effect with a low degree of specification of the set value being set (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the first effect mode, a suggestion effect during game, a suggestion effect during a big hit). It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data (for example, pre-game suggestive effect determination table, in-game suggestive effect determination table, and big hit suggestive effect determination table) for determining the execution mode of the suggestive effect, the execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined. A suggestive effect determining means for determining (for example, a portion that executes steps 012IWS510, S512, S514, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, S906 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b),
The suggestive effect determination means,
The execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the set value that is set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b stores in the setting value storage area of the RAM012IW122b). Execute steps 012IWS510, S705, and S902 based on the stored setting values),
When the set value information is not normally input, the execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the predetermined set value (for example, the set value “1”) (for example, the second effect control). CPU for 012IW120b executes steps 012IWS512, S707, and S904 based on the setting value "1".
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can prevent an increase in data capacity.

In the present characteristic part 012IW, "determining the execution mode of the suggested effect" includes not only determining whether or not to execute the suggested effect, but also determining the effect mode of the suggested effect. is there.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means, at least, a suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect or pre-game suggestive effect or It is also possible to make it possible to execute the initial performance, etc.). According to such a configuration, the player can be interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game and play the game from an early time slot. It can be motivated to do, and can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after changing the setting and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 32-7(A), (B), and FIGS. 32-24(A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 32-24(A) and (B)).
It is described that a notification unit capable of notifying information on the executed suggestion effect (for example, the part where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes step S012IWS516) may be further provided. According to this, it is possible to confirm the suggested effects that have been executed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect at different rates according to the set value that is set (see, for example, FIGS. 32-26 (A) and (B)),
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, the limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 32-26 (D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the fourth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different rates according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 32-26 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when it is executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the big hit suggestion production is recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion production. It is described that it is possible to further provide a hard-to-use character effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 10 of the fourth invention,
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) differs depending on a set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 32-6).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the fourth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs according to the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 32-8).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 12 of the fourth invention,
An opening/closing member that can be opened and closed, and a restricting member (for example, a security cover 012IW500A/security cover 012IW500B/security cover 012IW500C) that can restrict the operation of the operation unit,
When the opening/closing body is closed, the regulation member maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation portion is regulated, and when the opening/closing body is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. In this state, the security cover 012IW500A maintains a regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 012IW051 is regulated, while the game machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the security cover 012IW500A 32-3, 32-4, and 32-44 to FIG. 32-47), the restricted state is released and the operation of the setting key 012IW051 is permitted.
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 12 of the fourth invention that can be applied to the gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the fourth invention described above.

Further, the characteristic part 012IW also includes the fifth invention described below. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and to be able to execute control in an advantageous state based on the set value being set. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, a variation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the production control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the variation stop command. It is described that, based on the value, display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that wrong suggestive performance may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) (for example, step in game control microcomputer 100) 012IWS042 execution part),
A game control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set,
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 012IWS047 and S178) ,
Based on the setting value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (eg, second effect) capable of executing suggestive effects (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, and big hit suggestive effect) (A part that executes steps 012IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, S901 to S906) in the control CPU 012IW120b),
The suggestion effect executing means limits the execution of the suggestion effect when the setting value information output from the information output means is not normal (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets N in step 012IWS513, When N in S708 and N in S905, the pre-game suggesting effect, the in-game suggesting effect, and the big hit suggesting effect are not executed).
According to this feature, according to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Further, as a game machine of means A of the fifth invention for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) (for example, step in game control microcomputer 100) 012IWS042 execution part),
A game control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set,
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 012IWS047 and S178) ,
Based on the setting value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (eg, second effect) capable of executing suggestive effects (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, and big hit suggestive effect) (A part that executes steps 012IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, S901 to S906) in the control CPU 012IW120b),
When the setting value information output from the information output unit is not normal, the suggestion effect executing means limits the execution of the suggestion effect (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets N in step 012IWS513, When N in S708 and N in S905, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect are not executed),
further,
Based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has been won in the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b), a profit giving means capable of giving a profit to the player (for example, for game control) The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) includes a jackpot game, which is controlled to a probable state after the end of the game.
The specific condition can be satisfied based on at least a predetermined condition being satisfied (for example, a probability variation big hit),
When the specific condition is not satisfied even though the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to store specific information that can specify that the specific condition has not been satisfied (for example, log information of the probability change failure date/time). A gaming machine characterized by including a specific information storage means (for example, a portion that executes steps 012IWS958 to S960 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) is described. According to this characteristic, the setting is set. In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, the information can be preferably stored.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes the steps 012IWS047 and S178 to transmit the set value command at the time of turning on the power and at the start of the fluctuation). Do)
According to such a configuration, even if the setting value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the setting value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, as the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect with a high degree of specification of the set value being set (for example, pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, in-game suggestive effect, and big hit in the fourth effect mode). It is possible to execute a suggestion effect) and a second suggestion effect with a low degree of specification of the set value being set (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the first effect mode, a suggestion effect during game, a suggestion effect during a big hit). It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means, at least, a suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect or pre-game suggestive effect or It is also possible to make it possible to execute the initial performance, etc.). According to such a configuration, the player can be interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game and play the game from an early time slot. It can be motivated to do, and can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after changing the setting and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 32-7(A), (B), and FIGS. 32-24(A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 32-24(A) and (B)).
It is described that a notification unit capable of notifying information on the executed suggestion effect (for example, the part where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes step S012IWS516) may be further provided. According to this, it is possible to confirm the suggested effects that have been executed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect at different rates according to the set value that is set (see, for example, FIGS. 32-26 (A) and (B)),
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, the limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 32-26 (D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the fifth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different rates according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 32-26 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when it is executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the big hit suggestion production is recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion production. It is described that it is possible to further provide a hard-to-use character effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the fifth invention,
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) differs depending on a set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 32-6).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the fifth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs according to the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 32-8).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the fifth invention,
An opening/closing member that can be opened and closed, and a restricting member (for example, a security cover 012IW500A/security cover 012IW500B/security cover 012IW500C) that can restrict the operation of the operation unit,
When the opening/closing body is closed, the regulation member maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation portion is regulated, and when the opening/closing body is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. In this state, the security cover 012IW500A maintains a regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 012IW051 is regulated, while the game machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the security cover 012IW500A 32-3, 32-4, and 32-44 to FIG. 32-47), the restricted state is released and the operation of the setting key 012IW051 is permitted.
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 11 of the fifth invention that can be applied to the gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the fifth invention described above.

Further, the characteristic part 012IW also includes a sixth invention described below. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and to be able to execute control in an advantageous state based on the set value being set. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, a variation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the production control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the variation stop command. It is described that, based on the value, display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that wrong suggestive performance may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) (for example, step in game control microcomputer 100) 012IWS042 execution part),
A game control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set,
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 012IWS047 and S178) ,
Based on the setting value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (eg, second effect) capable of executing suggestive effects (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, and big hit suggestive effect) (A part that executes steps 012IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, S901 to S906) in the control CPU 012IW120b),
The suggestive effect execution means,
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect in the third effect mode, a suggestive effect during game, and a big hit suggestive effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) It is possible to execute pre suggestion production, suggestion production during game, suggestion production during big hit),
When the setting value information output from the information output unit is not normal, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect is executable as the suggestive effect (for example, By executing steps 012IWS514, S709, and S906, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect or the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, or the big hit midpoint suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode).
According to this feature, according to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Further, as a game machine of means A of the sixth invention for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) (for example, step in game control microcomputer 100) 012IWS042 execution part),
A game control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set,
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 012IWS047 and S178) ,
Based on the setting value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (eg, second effect) capable of executing suggestive effects (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, and big hit suggestive effect) (A part that executes steps 012IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, S901 to S906) in the control CPU 012IW120b),
The suggestive effect execution means,
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect in the third effect mode, a suggestive effect during game, and a big hit suggestive effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) It is possible to execute pre suggestion production, suggestion production during game, suggestion production during big hit),
When the setting value information output from the information output unit is not normal, the second suggestive effect can be executed as the suggestive effect without executing the first suggestive effect as the suggestive effect (for example, By executing steps 012IWS514, S709, and S906, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect or the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, or the big hit mid-time suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode),
further,
Based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has been won in the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b), a profit giving means capable of giving a profit to the player (for example, for game control) The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) includes a jackpot game, which is controlled to a probable state after the end of the game.
The specific condition can be satisfied based on at least a predetermined condition being satisfied (for example, a probability variation big hit),
When the specific condition is not satisfied even though the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to store specific information that can specify that the specific condition has not been satisfied (for example, log information of the probability change failure date/time). A gaming machine characterized by including a specific information storage means (for example, a portion that executes steps 012IWS958 to S960 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) is described. According to this characteristic, the setting is set. In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, the information can be preferably stored.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes the steps 012IWS047 and S178 to transmit the set value command at the time of turning on the power and at the start of the fluctuation). Do)
According to such a configuration, even if the setting value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the setting value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, as the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect with a high degree of specification of the set value being set (for example, pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, in-game suggestive effect, and big hit in the fourth effect mode). It is possible to execute a suggestion effect) and a second suggestion effect with a low degree of specification of the set value being set (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the first effect mode, a suggestion effect during game, a suggestion effect during a big hit). It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data (for example, pre-game suggestive effect determination table, in-game suggestive effect determination table, and big hit suggestive effect determination table) for determining the execution mode of the suggestive effect, the execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined. A suggestive effect determining means for determining (for example, a portion that executes steps 012IWS510, S512, S514, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, S906 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b),
The suggestive effect determination means,
The execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the set value that is set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b stores in the setting value storage area of the RAM012IW122b). Execute steps 012IWS510, S705, and S902 based on the stored setting values),
If the set value information is not normally input, using dedicated decision data (for example, pre-game suggestive effect determination table for effect mode C, in-game suggestive effect determination table, big hit suggestive effect determination table), The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, the big hit suggestion effect determination table, (Steps 012IWS514, S709, S906 are executed)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means, at least, a suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect or pre-game suggestive effect or It is also possible to make it possible to execute the initial performance, etc.). According to such a configuration, the player can be interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game and play the game from an early time slot. It can be motivated to do, and can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after changing the setting and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 32-7(A), (B), and FIGS. 32-24(A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 32-24(A) and (B)).
It is described that a notification unit capable of notifying information on the executed suggestion effect (for example, the part where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes step S012IWS516) may be further provided. According to this, it is possible to confirm the suggested effects that have been executed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect at different rates according to the set value that is set (see, for example, FIGS. 32-26 (A) and (B)),
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, the limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 32-26 (D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the sixth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different rates according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 32-26 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when it is executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the big hit suggestion production is recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion production. It is described that it is possible to further provide a hard-to-use character effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the sixth invention,
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) differs depending on a set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 32-6).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the sixth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs according to the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 32-8).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 12 of the sixth invention,
An opening/closing member that can be opened and closed, and a restricting member (for example, a security cover 012IW500A/security cover 012IW500B/security cover 012IW500C) that can restrict the operation of the operation unit,
When the opening/closing body is closed, the regulation member maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation portion is regulated, and when the opening/closing body is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. In this state, the security cover 012IW500A maintains a regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 012IW051 is regulated, while the game machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the security cover 012IW500A 32-3, 32-4, and 32-44 to FIG. 32-47), the restricted state is released and the operation of the setting key 012IW051 is permitted.
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 12 of the sixth invention applicable to the gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the sixth invention described above.

In addition, in the characteristic part 012IW, it is configured to be able to change to three types of effect modes A to C, and when the set value information is not normally input when the effect mode A is controlled, If the player is able to perform the suggestive effect as if it is set to a predetermined set value that is less advantageous to the player (the above-mentioned fourth invention), and if the effect mode B is controlled, the set value is set. When the information is not normally input, it is configured to limit the execution of the suggested effect (the above-mentioned fifth invention configuration), and when the effect mode C is controlled, the set value information is normally input. If not, the case is shown in which the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect is executable as the suggestive effect (the structure of the sixth invention described above). I can't stop. For example, the control method of any of the above-mentioned fourth invention to sixth invention may be switched depending on the game state. In this case, for example, if the game state is the normal state, if the set value information is not normally input, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect assuming that the preset value is set to have a low advantage for the player. In the configuration (configuration of the above-mentioned fourth invention), if the game state is a time-saving state, if the setting value information is not normally input, the execution of the suggestive effect is limited (configuration of the above-mentioned fifth invention). If the game state is a probability change state and the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect is executable as the suggestive effect ( The above configuration of the sixth invention) may be performed.

Moreover, it is not necessary to configure the suggestive effect by any of the control methods of the fourth to sixth inventions described above, and it is possible to configure the suggestive effect by using only one of the control methods. Good.

In addition, in the characteristic part 012IW, when the set value command itself cannot be received due to missing or garbled data, the control method of the fourth invention to the sixth invention controls execution of the suggestive effect. Although the effect is limited), the case is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the set value command is received, but the received set value command is inconsistent, the suggestive effect may be limited. In this case, for example, every time a setting value command is received, the setting value indicated by the setting value command received on the effect control means side is stored, and when a new setting value command is received thereafter, a new setting value command is newly stored. When the setting value indicated by the setting value command received in step S1 and the setting value stored last time do not match, it is determined that a mismatch has occurred, and execution of the suggestive effect is performed by the control method of the above fourth invention to sixth invention. You may make it control (limit suggestive production).

Also, the way to make the game different for each of the set values "1" to "3" is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, if the set value is an odd number such as “1” or “3”, a series of villas (a big hit continuously occurring during a probability change state) is likely to occur and a series of villas occurs. It is configured so that there is a large difference from when it is difficult, and if the set value is an even number such as the set value "2", the susceptibility to the consecutive holidays is configured to be relatively constant and does not change. The suggestion effect suggesting that the number is an odd number may be configured to be executable. Then, in this case, when the set value command cannot be normally received, the execution of the suggestive effect suggesting that the set value is an odd number is controlled by the control methods of the above fourth invention to sixth invention. It may be configured to perform (limit suggestive effects).

The seventh aspect of the invention described below is also included in the characteristic part 012IW. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the suggestion of the set value is performed only during the variable display, and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 29),
A suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests a set value being set,
The suggestion effect execution means, at least during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display, the suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect) at a different rate depending on the set value being set. It is described that the game machine is characterized by being able to execute (or initial result production, etc.). According to this feature, the player is interested in the state of the game machine before the game starts, and the game is played from an early time period. It can be motivated to do, and can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the seventh invention for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 29),
A suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests a set value being set,
The suggestion effect execution means, at least during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display, the suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect) at a different rate depending on the set value being set. And initial appearance production) can be executed,
further,
Based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has been won in the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b), a profit giving means capable of giving a profit to the player (for example, for game control) The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) includes a jackpot game, which is controlled to a probable state after the end of the game.
The specific condition can be satisfied based on at least a predetermined condition being satisfied (for example, a probability variation big hit),
When the specific condition is not satisfied even though the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to store specific information that can specify that the specific condition has not been satisfied (for example, log information of the probability change failure date/time). A game machine characterized by including specific information storage means (for example, a part that executes steps 012IWS958 to S960 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) is described, and according to this feature, the game before the start of the game is described. It is possible to give interest to the state of the machine and to motivate the player to play the game from an early time period, which can enhance the interest of the game. In addition, the information can be preferably stored.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the seventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of production identification information (for example, decorative design),
The suggestive effect executing means, during the period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed, suggestive effect in which different production identification information is displayed according to the set value that is set (for example, It is described that it is possible to execute the display of odd initial numbers), and such a configuration can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect according to the set value when the power supply to the gaming machine is restored after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (for example, FIG. 32). As shown in -21(A) and (B), a pre-game suggestive effect determination table with different determination values is used)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is capable of executing a specific suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect during a game or a suggestion effect during a big hit) that suggests the set value that has been set, after the variable display is started,
It is described that the specific suggestion effect may have a higher degree of reliability with respect to the suggested setting value than the suggestion effect, and such a configuration can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the seventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712) A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the display monitor 012IW029 that can display a continuous ratio, a winning combination, and a base).
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 5 of the seventh invention applicable to the gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the seventh invention described above.

In addition, the characteristic portion 012IW includes the eighth invention described below. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the motivation for playing the game cannot be effectively given and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eighth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 29),
A suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests a set value being set,
The suggestion effect executing means sets at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after the setting is changed and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 32-7(A), (B), and FIGS. 32-24(A), (B)).
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and enhance amusement of the game.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the eighth invention for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 29),
A suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests a set value being set,
The suggestion effect executing means sets at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after the setting is changed and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 32-7(A) and (B), FIGS. 32-24(A) and (B)),
further,
Based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has been won in the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b), a profit giving means capable of giving a profit to the player (for example, for game control) The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) includes a jackpot game, which is controlled to a probable state after the end of the game.
The specific condition can be satisfied based on at least a predetermined condition being satisfied (for example, a probability variation big hit),
When the specific condition is not satisfied even though the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to store specific information that can specify that the specific condition has not been satisfied (for example, log information of the probability change failure date/time). A game machine characterized by including a specific information storage means (for example, a portion that executes steps 012IWS958 to S960 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) is described. According to this feature, a game is played in a predetermined period. The motivation to play can be given, and the interest in playing the game can be enhanced. In addition, the information can be preferably stored.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine that variably displays and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of the plurality of variable display patterns according to different ratios when the set value is changed and when it is not changed (for example, FIG. 32-7(A), ( B))),
It is described that the variable display execution means may be capable of executing variable display using a common background image when the set value is changed and when it is not changed. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the eighth invention,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of the plurality of variable display patterns according to different ratios when the setting value is set to the first setting value and when the setting value is set to the second setting value by the setting means. (See, for example, FIGS. 32-7 (A) and (B)),
The variable display execution means can execute variable display using a common background image when the setting value is set to the first setting value and when the setting value is set to the second setting value by the setting means. However, according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the eighth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is that a predetermined condition is satisfied within a predetermined period (for example, a big hit in a specific period, the number of times the reach effect or the pseudo continuous effect is executed reaches a predetermined number, a specific super reach effect). The suggestive effect can be executed based on the fact that the notice effect has been executed, or the like (for example, when the big hit occurs within the specific period, the suggestive effect during the big hit can be executed. (See A) and (B))
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712) A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the display monitor 012IW029 that can display a continuous ratio, a winning combination, and a base).
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 5 of the eighth invention applicable to the gaming machine of means 1 of the eighth invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the eighth invention described above.

Further, the present characteristic part 012IW also includes a ninth invention described below. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem in that it is not possible to confirm suggestive effects that have been executed in the past, and it is not possible to sufficiently raise the interest. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the ninth invention, which solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 29),
A suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests a set value being set,
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 32-24(A) and (B)).
The gaming machine is described, further comprising an informing means capable of informing the information on the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes step S012IWS516). According to this, it is possible to confirm the suggested effects that have been executed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the ninth invention for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 29),
A suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests a set value being set,
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 32-24(A) and (B)).
In addition, a notification unit (for example, a portion where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes step S012IWS516) capable of notifying information on the executed suggested effect,
further,
Based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has been won in the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b), a profit giving means capable of giving a profit to the player (for example, for game control) The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) includes a jackpot game, which is controlled to a probable state after the end of the game.
The specific condition can be satisfied based on at least a predetermined condition being satisfied (for example, a probability variation big hit),
When the specific condition is not satisfied although the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to store specific information (for example, log information on the date and time when the probability change is not satisfied) that can specify that the specific condition is not satisfied. A game machine characterized by including specific information storage means (for example, a part that executes steps 012IWS958 to S960 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) is described, and according to this feature, it has been executed in the past. It is possible to confirm suggestive effects and enhance the interest of the game. In addition, the information can be preferably stored.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the ninth invention,
The notification means can notify the number of times the suggestive effect has been executed (for example, the part where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes step S012IWS516).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the ninth invention,
The notification means can notify the content of the suggested effect that has been executed (for example, the part where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes step S012IWS516).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the ninth invention,
The notification means can notify the information about the suggested effect that has been executed while the customer is not waiting for variable display (for example, the part where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes step S012IWS516).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the ninth invention,
Information generating means for generating information (e.g., execution history information) related to the executed suggestive effect;
Image generation means for generating a specific image (for example, a two-dimensional code including execution history information) from which the information can be read by an imaging device;
It is described that a display unit (for example, the image display device 5) that displays the specific image in a manner that can be captured by the image capturing device may be provided. Can be increased.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712) A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the display monitor 012IW029 that can display a continuous ratio, a winning combination, and a base).
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 6 of the ninth invention that can be applied to the gaming machine of means 1 of the ninth invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the ninth invention described above.

Further, the present characteristic part 012IW includes the tenth invention described below. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that if the setting suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize by other effects, the interest may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the tenth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 29),
A suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests a set value being set,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 32-26 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, a limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect is further provided (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. (See (D))
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the tenth invention for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 29),
A suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests a set value being set,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 32-26 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, a limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect is further provided (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See D)),
further,
Based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has been won in the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b), a profit giving means capable of giving a profit to the player (for example, for game control) The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) includes a jackpot game, which is controlled to a probable state after the end of the game.
The specific condition can be satisfied based on at least a predetermined condition being satisfied (for example, a probability variation big hit),
When the specific condition is not satisfied although the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to store specific information (for example, log information on the date and time when the probability change is not satisfied) that can specify that the specific condition is not satisfied. A game machine characterized by including specific information storage means (for example, a part that executes steps 012IWS958 to S960 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) is described, and according to this feature, a decrease in interest is prevented. can do. In addition, the information can be preferably stored.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the 10th invention,
The limiting means changes the execution timing of at least one of the suggestive effect and the predetermined effect when the execution timings of the suggestive effect and the predetermined effect overlap (for example, one of them is executed in the fanfare period, and the other is ended. Change to run in period)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the tenth invention,
The limiting means prohibits the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestive effect is executed (for example, the execution of the accessory effect is prohibited when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed. See FIG. 32-26 (D). )
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the tenth invention,
When the suggestive effect is executed, the limiting means executes the predetermined effect in an effect mode in which the suggestive effect does not become difficult to recognize (for example, the movable member 012IW101 is operated in an operation mode different from the normal mode (e.g. Control so that it does not stop at a position that overlaps with the dialogue image produced by the production))
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the tenth invention,
The suggestive effect and the predetermined effect (for example, fanfare effect for displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5) include display on one display unit (for example, the image display device 5),
It is described that the one display means may display the display related to the suggestive effect prior to the display related to the predetermined effect, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest. You can

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the tenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712) A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the display monitor 012IW029 that can display a continuous ratio, a winning combination, and a base).
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 6 of the tenth invention that can be applied to the gaming machine of means 1 of the tenth invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the tenth invention described above.

Further, the present characteristic part 012IW includes the eleventh invention described below. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem in that there is a possibility that the entertainment may be deteriorated by executing the setting suggesting effect which is not preferable for the player. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the eleventh invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 29),
A setting suggestion executing means capable of executing a setting suggestion (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value being set,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 32-26 (A) and (B)),
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when it is executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the big hit suggestion production is recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion production. A game machine characterized by further providing a difficult character effect, a light guide effect, an error display, etc. is described. According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

In addition, as a game machine of means A of the eleventh invention for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 29),
A setting suggestion executing means capable of executing a setting suggestion (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value being set,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 32-26 (A) and (B)),
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the big hit suggestion effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion effect. It is further equipped with hard-to-use feature effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.,
further,
Based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has been won in the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b), a profit giving means capable of giving a profit to the player (for example, for game control) The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) includes a jackpot game, which is controlled to a probable state after the end of the game.
The specific condition can be satisfied based on at least a predetermined condition being satisfied (for example, a probability variation big hit),
When the specific condition is not satisfied although the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to store specific information (for example, log information on the date and time when the probability change is not satisfied) that can specify that the specific condition is not satisfied. A game machine characterized by including specific information storage means (for example, a part that executes steps 012IWS958 to S960 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) is described, and according to this feature, a decrease in interest is prevented. can do. In addition, the information can be preferably stored.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the 11th invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, character effect) for operating the movable member (for example, the movable member 012IW101). According to such a configuration, , The production effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the 11th invention,
A light guide plate (for example, a light guide plate 012IW103) having a light transmitting property capable of transmitting light,
A light-emitting body provided so that light can enter from the end surface of the light guide plate,
The light guide plate is provided with a reflection unit that reflects the light that has entered the inside of the light guide plate from the end surface of the light guide plate by the light emitter and emits the light to the front surface of the gaming machine.
The predetermined notification means is configured to be capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, light guide plate effect) in which light is emitted from the light emitting plate to the front surface of the game machine by causing the light emitting body to emit light. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of presentation.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the 11th invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing a predetermined notification for displaying an error. According to such a configuration, the error can be appropriately notified.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the 11th invention,
The setting suggestion executing means is a first setting suggestion that suggests that the setting has been made to the first set value (for example, suggestion during big hit in the first effect mode. See FIGS. 32-26 (A) and (B)). , A second setting suggestion that suggests that a second set value that is more advantageous to the player than the first set value is set (for example, a big hit medium suggestion effect in the third effect mode. (See A) and (B)),
The predetermined notification means can execute the predetermined notification at a higher rate when the first setting suggestion is executed than when the second setting suggestion is executed (for example, see FIG. 32-26 (E)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the 11th invention,
A setting suggestion setting means capable of setting an execution rate of setting suggestion is provided (for example, a setting screen is displayed after power-on, operation means such as a push button 31B, operation means such as a switch provided inside the gaming machine (management Can be operated only by the person) so that the setting related to the setting suggestion effect can be changed)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the eleventh invention,
A gaming machine that variably displays identification information,
A variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information by rotating a variable display member (for example, a drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body) on which the identification information is arranged,
The variable display device performs a specific operation in the variable display of the first identification information after the setting value is changed,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute the predetermined notification at a high rate in the variable display of the first identification information after the setting value is changed. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the eleventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712) A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the display monitor 012IW029 that can display a continuous ratio, a winning combination, and a base).
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 8 of the eleventh invention applicable to the gaming machine of means 1 of the eleventh invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the eleventh invention described above.

The characteristic part 012IW also includes a twelfth invention described below. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that gambling is likely to be too high when the setting is high. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the twelfth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing),
And a game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 29),
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) differs depending on a set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 32-6).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Further, as a game machine of means A of the twelfth invention for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing),
And a game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 29),
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) varies depending on a set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 32-6),
further,
Based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has been won in the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b), a profit giving means capable of giving a profit to the player (for example, for game control) The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) includes a jackpot game, which is controlled to a probable state after the end of the game.
The specific condition can be satisfied based on at least a predetermined condition being satisfied (for example, a probability variation big hit),
When the specific condition is not satisfied even though the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to store specific information that can specify that the specific condition has not been satisfied (for example, log information of the probability change failure date/time). A gaming machine characterized by including a specific information storage means (for example, a portion that executes steps 012IWS958 to S960 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) is described. It can be prevented from passing too much. In addition, the information can be preferably stored.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the twelfth invention,
The fanfare control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 32-6(B)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the twelfth invention,
The interval control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value that has been set (for example, see FIG. 32-6(B)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the twelfth invention,
The ending control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 32-6(B)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing with a gaming value,
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means sets the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the magnitude of the game value given by the game value giving means to the magnitude of the game value used for the game more than the first set value. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that makes up a higher proportion,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state is longer when set to the second set value than when set to the first set value (for example, FIGS. 32-6(A) and (B)). reference)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting a set value (for example, a suggestive effect during a big hit) may be provided in a predetermined control period in the advantageous state. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest of the predetermined control period in the advantageous state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the twelfth invention,
Equipped with production execution means capable of executing production,
The effect executing means is configured to be able to execute a common effect (for example, a common fanfare effect, interval effect, ending effect, etc.) during a predetermined control period in the advantageous state, regardless of the set value being set. According to such a configuration, the interest of the predetermined control period in the advantageous state can be increased.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be set in advance according to the set value that is set, and with such a configuration, the gambling performance becomes too high. It can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 9 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine capable of controlling in a plurality of advantageous states,
The game control means can control one of a plurality of types of the advantageous states (for example, jackpot types A to C) at different ratios based on the set value that has been set,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the type of the advantageous state (for example, see FIG. 32-6(B)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712) A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the display monitor 012IW029 that can display a continuous ratio, a winning combination, and a base).
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 10 of the twelfth invention applicable to the gaming machine of means 1 of the twelfth invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the twelfth invention described above.

The characteristic part 012IW also includes the thirteenth invention described below. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that gambling is likely to be too high when the setting is high. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the 13th invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing),
And a game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 29),
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs according to the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 32-8).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Further, as a game machine of means A of the thirteenth invention for solving the problem of the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing),
And a game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 29),
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs according to the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 32-8),
further,
Based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has been won in the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b), a profit giving means capable of giving a profit to the player (for example, for game control) The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) includes a jackpot game, which is controlled to a probable state after the end of the game.
The specific condition can be satisfied based on at least a predetermined condition being satisfied (for example, a probability variation big hit),
When the specific condition is not satisfied even though the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to store specific information that can specify that the specific condition has not been satisfied (for example, log information of the probability change failure date/time). A gaming machine characterized by including a specific information storage means (for example, a portion that executes steps 012IWS958 to S960 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) is described. It can be prevented from passing too much. In addition, the information can be preferably stored.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the 13th invention,
The variable display period varies depending on the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 32-8).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the 13th invention,
It is described that the period during which the variable display result is displayed may be different depending on the set value that has been set. With such a configuration, the gambling performance becomes too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the 13th invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing with a gaming value,
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means sets the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the magnitude of the game value given by the game value giving means to the magnitude of the game value used for the game more than the first set value. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that makes up a higher proportion,
The predetermined control period for variable display is longer when the second set value is set than when the first set value is set (see, for example, FIG. 32-8).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the 13th invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period regarding the variable display may be set in advance according to the set value that is set, and with such a configuration, the gambling performance becomes too high. It can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the 13th invention,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines any of a plurality of variable display patterns having different variable display periods at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIG. 32-8).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the 13th invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712) A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the display monitor 012IW029 that can display a continuous ratio, a winning combination, and a base).
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 7 of the thirteenth invention applicable to the gaming machine of means 1 of the thirteenth invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the thirteenth invention described above.

In addition, in the characteristic part 012IW, the case where the setting value can be set in three steps of the setting values “1” to “3” is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the setting value of four steps or more is set, for example. It may be configured such that it can be set to a value or it can be set to a two-step set value. In this case, for example, it is configured so that it can be set to six setting values, and the setting value “1” has the lowest expectation (reliability) for the big hit, and the setting value “6” has the expectation () for the big hit ( The reliability may be the highest.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special pattern display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 Game effect lamp 10 General prize hole 11 Main board (game control board)
12 ... Production control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Ordinary pattern display 21 ... Gate switches 22A, 22B ... Starting opening switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Hit ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... push button 32 ... movable body 100 ... game control microcomputers 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103... CPU
104, 124... Random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120... CPU for production control
123... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing,
Control means, an input circuit for transmitting input data based on an input signal from an electronic component used for controlling the control means to the control means, and an electronic component based on output data transmitted from the control means An output circuit that outputs an output signal, and a substrate on which a wiring pattern is formed are mounted,
The wiring pattern includes a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means and transmission of output data from the control means to the output circuit,
The input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the output circuit,
further,
Based on the fact that the specific condition is established, it is equipped with a profit giving means capable of giving a profit to the player,
The specific condition can be satisfied based on at least a predetermined condition being satisfied,
When the specific condition is not satisfied even though the predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific information storage unit capable of storing specific information capable of specifying that the specific condition is not satisfied is provided. And a gaming machine.